Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Plans (76)
� PROJECT MANUAL 1 o FOODS 1 � STORENO . 23 1 (Sushi Kiosk) ' TIGARD, OREGON 1 i 1 1 PROJECT MANUAL 1 for 1 1 WINCO STORE NO . 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 7501 DARTMOUTH STREET TIGARD, OREGON 1 i WINCO FOODS, LLC 1 P.O . Box 5756 BOISE, IDAHO 83705-5756 1 1 DATE: November 12 , 2015 WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) PROJECT INFORMATION PAGE 000120- 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 SECTION 000200- CONSULTANT DIRECTORY BUILDING ARCHITECT: Name: Bruce W. Petersen,NCARE3 Address: 5200 W. State Street, Boise, Idaho 83703 Phone: 208-348-1462 Fax: 208-345-1532 Contact/E-mail: Chad Pollock/chad__p@psarch.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Name: Structural Edge 1 Address: 2484 N Stokesberry Place Boise, Idaho 83646 Phone: 208-395-5105 Contact/E-mail: Dave Sansotta /davids@structuraIedge.com MECHANICAL ENGINEER: Name: DC Engineering Address: 440 E. Corporate Drive, Meridian, Idaho 83642 Phone: 208-288-2181 -Fax: 208-288-2182 Contact/E-mail: Bill Crabb/bcrabb@dcengineering.net ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Name: DC Engineering 1 Address: 440 F. Corporate Drive, Meridian, Idaho 83642 Phone: 208-288-218] 'Fax: 208-288-2182 U Contact/E-mail: Roger Dean •/rdean@dcengineering.net REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DESIGN: Name: DC Engineering Address: 123 W. Spruce St. Missoula, MT 59802 Phone: 406-829-8828 x-225 Fax: 406-829-8829 Contact/E-mail: Mark Chumrau/mchumrauCr,dcengineering.net 111 FIRE PROJECTION ENGINEER: ' Name: Protection Consultants, Inc. Address: 1 199 South Main Street Ste. 101 Centerville, Utah 84014 Phone: 801 -295-6070 X-102 ' Fax: 801-677-0000 Contact/E-mail: Greg Jones/greg@pciut.com U END OF SECTION 000200 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CONSULTANT DIRECTORY 000200- 1 I WENCO FOODS, LLC 03/14 ISECTION 000400--TABLE OF CONTENTS I DIVISION 00—BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 000120 PROJECT INFORMATION PAGE 000200 CONSULTANT DIRECTORY I 000400 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000600 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 001000 INVITATION TO BIDDERS AIA A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I SI SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO AlA DOCUMENT A701, INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA A310 131D BOND I AIA G705 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AIA A101 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AIA A312 PAYMENT BOND I AIA A312 PERFORMANCE BOND AIA 0707 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT AIA 0702 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT AIA 6703 CONTINUATION SHEET I AIA 0706 CONTRACTORS AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEE3TS AND CLAIMS AlA G706A CONTRACTORS AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS AIA A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION I SC SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS To THE AIA DOCUMENT A201, CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ALA 0701 CHANGE ORDER. I AIA 0709 PROPOSAL REQUEST AIA 0710 ARCHITECTS SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION AIA G7I2 SHOP DRAWING AND SAMPLE RECORD AIA G714 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE IAIA G704 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 003000 BID FORM I DIVISION 01-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY FORM 011000A DISPOSED EQUIPMENT LIST 012300 ALTERNATES 012400 SEPARATE PRICES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES I 012900 013300 PAYMENT PROCEDURES SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013900 INSPECTIONS,TESTING AND REPORTS(SPECIAL INSPECTIONS) 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS I015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 017300 EXECUTION ()17329 CUTTING AND PATCHING I 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS m I IWINCO S'T'ORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TABLE OF CONTENTS 000400-1 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/14 019115 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE PLAN I 019115A NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT 0191 1513 CONTRACTOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM 0191 15C CONTRACTOR REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE AGREEMENT 019115D INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 019115E EQUIPMENT INVENTORY FORM 019115F REFRIGERANT TRACKING FORM 0191 15G LEAK INSPECTION REVIEW FORM 0191151-I WINCO COMPANY PERSONNEL POLICIES I DIVISION 02-EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03—CONCRETE I 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033300 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE I DIVISION 04—MASONRY(NOT USED) DIVISION 05—METALS I 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06- WOOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 066400 PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION I 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08—OPENINGS I 088000 GLAZING DIVISION 09-FINISHES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS I 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096726 URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH CO - ' _, O _ • ' r ' = ' ■ AGGREGATE 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES(NOT USED) DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT(NOT USED) DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS(NOT USED) I DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION(NOT USED) DIVISION 14-CONVEYING EQUIPMENT(NOT USED) I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I TABLE OF CONTENTS 000400-2 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/14 DIVISION 21 -FIRE SUPPRESSION(NOT USED) DIVISION 22—PLUMBING 220000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220523 GENERAL DUTY VALUES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 221 116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221119 DOMESTIC WA"I ER PIPING SPECIALTIES221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES IDIVISION 23-HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING(NOT USED) 236395 REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION ' 236395A REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION APPENDIX A INSTALLATION CONTRACTORS 236993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR REFRIGRERATION CONTROLS ' CONTRACTORS DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ' DIVISION 27—COMMUNICATIONS(NOT USED) DIVISION 28-ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY(NOT USED) DIVISION 31-EARTHWORK(NOT USED) ' DIVISION 32-EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS(NOT USED) DIVISION 33--UTILITIES(NOT USED) ENI) OF SECTION 000400 1 1 ' WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TABLE OF CONTENTS 000400-3 i 1 I -009000 SJNIMV2ICI cIO I €(1CI::1IIJS (>Iso!)I i1[snS) £Z '(.)N Awls OJNIM 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 009000 NO11D S JO aMa I NV-Id 217'I)IN[21dS i21[d lcI ' S i'I('1CI::[IIJS S"IIV..I,i:IC1 `SNV'IcI [21 SNV1I1VJI2I.LJ3'I:_['IVLL2IVc[ S IIV..L It1 CINV Sa'i(1CIcII-IDS DNIIIINflrIri £d SNV'-ld ON!IIIAIf1`id iVl..L21Vcl Zd SNV-Id I d S [[V1 TC1 I'EV SNOLLJ:_IS £V S I1V I ICI�b'SNOIVATl' ZV SNVId '1VI.i.,2IVd €V 1., I'_I1IS 2IanOJ ID %i'-1..L.LL..[.::Ii3HS 21i:lWAI1IN.L::1;:II-IS SONIMVNCI IO::I'i(1CI IRDS - 009000 NOLLJ'r_IS I 17I/b0 J"I'i `SQOOd O:.)NL[M WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 SICTION 001000- INVITATION TO BIDDERS WinCo Foods, LLC invites a select list of General Contractors to bid on the general construction,to include all mechanical,electrical and fire sprinkler work, generally described as follows: ' All the work shown on the contract documents for the WinCo Store to include General Construction, Plumbing and HVAC, Electrical, Fire Sprinkler work and Finishes all in agreement with WinCo Foods, LLC General Conditions for Construction and the Drawings and Specifications. WinCo Foods, LLC will receive an executed faxed or e-mailed Bid Form from the selected General Contractors until 2:00 p.m. local prevailing time on Friday, November 20, 2015, sent to Andrew Beall, Facilities Project Manager. Fax No.: 208-377-0474; email: andrew.beall@wincofoods.com. Bid Forms not received by WinCo representative by the above time listed may not be accepted. Sealed original bid proposal to include Bid Security and List of Subcontractors shall follow to Andrew Beall, Facilities Project Manager, WinCo Foods LLC, 650 N. Armstrong Place, Boise, Idaho, 83704, Phone: 208-377-0110 via courier within 24 hours of the bid receipt date. WinCo personnel will privately open and review the bid proposal and notify each bidder of the result of the bid. All Request for Information during bidding shall be submitted directly to the Architect. Any RFI submitted to the Owner,will not be answered. The Bidding documents are on file and may be reviewed at the office of the Architect. The General Contractors shall be furnished at no cost with 1 set in PDF format of the Drawings and Project Manual. Bid Security in the amount of 5 percent of the Base Bid shall be submitted with the bid proposal. The Bid Security shall be as described in AIA A701, Instructions to Bidders. END OF SECTION 001000 I I 1 I 1 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) INVITATION TO BIDDERS 001000- 1 I II I Document A7OITM - 1997 Instructions to Bidders for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has THE OWNER: added information needed for its completion.The author may also (Name, legal status and address) have revised the text of the original AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to • THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal stains and address, from standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where TABLE OF ARTICLES the author has added to or deleted from the original AIR text. 1 DEFINITIONS This document has important legal 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS consequences.Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS to its completion or modification. 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 1 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR I I I AIA Document A701 TS 1997.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document Is protected by U,S.Copyright Law and international Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw.This document was produced by AIA software all1:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015.and is not for resale, User Notes: (1148155183) I 1 ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents.The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders,the bid form,and other sample bidding and contract forms.The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings,Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 111 § 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,AiA Document A201,or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. § 1.3 Addenda arc written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions,deletions,clarifications or corrections. § 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein,submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. § 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base,to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. § 1.6 An Alternate Bid(or Alternate)is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work,as described in the Bidding Documents,is accepted. § 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials,equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. § 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. § 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials,equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: § 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents,to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted,and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. § 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. § 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed-t►trd has correlated the-Bidder's_personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. § 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials,equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 COPIES § 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum,if any,stated therein.The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids.The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit.A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. ' AIA Document A701 r"'—1997.Copyright®1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING/This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AiA5 Document,or 2 any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale, User Notes: (1148155183) i § 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not he issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or invitation to Bid,or in supplementary instructions to bidders. § 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids;neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. § 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work.No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding I Documents. § 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other,and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted,shall examine the site and local conditions,and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. § 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.2.3 Interpretations,corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations,corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not he binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. § 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS § 3.3.1 The materials,products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function,dimension,appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. § 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten clays prior to the date for receipt of Bids.Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings,performance and test data,and other information necessary for an evaluation.A statement setting forth changes in other materials,equipment or other portions of the Work,including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require,shall he included.The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer.The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. § 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids,such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. § 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. § 3.4 ADDENDA § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. § 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. § 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.4.4 Bach Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued,and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. 1 AIA Document A701 TM—1997.Copyright 1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects,All rights reserved.WARNINGThis AIA' Document is protected by U,5.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or 3 any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1148155183) I r ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. § 4.1.2 All blanks on the hid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. § 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy,the amount written in words shall govern. § 4.1.4 Interlineations,alterations and erasures must he initialed by the signer of the Bid. § 4.1,5 All requested Alternates shall be bid.If no change in the Base Bid is required,enter"No Change." § 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested,the Bidder may,without forfeiture of the bid security,state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder.The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other planner. § 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder.The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract.A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed.A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. § 4.2 BID SECURITY § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders.The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will,if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required,the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages,not as a penalty.The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2. § 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required,it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond,unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents,and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. § 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either(a)the Contract has been executed and bonds,if required,have been furnished,or(h)the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or(c)all Bids have been rejected. § 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS § 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid,the bid security, if any,and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid111 -shall-be enclosed in-a-sea The-envelope shall be addressed to the partyreceiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name,the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable,the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail,the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED"on the face thereof. § 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. I § 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. § 4.3.4 Oral,telephonic,telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. I § 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID § 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified,withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids,and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. AIA Document A701'"—1997.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNiNG;This AlAe Document is protected by U,S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document,or 4 any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:51:00 on 12/0412014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1148155183) i I I § 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids,a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by I notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall he in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall he received,and date-and time-stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids.A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. § 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they arc then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. I § 4.4.4 Bid security, if required,shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS I At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will he read aloud.An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. I § 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids.A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents,or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to Irejection. § 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been I submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment,is in the Owner's own best interests. I § 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination,unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents,and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. I ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect,upon request,a properly I executed AIA Document A305,Contractor's Qualification Statement,unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. § 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY I The Owner shall,at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids,furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished,the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. I § 6.3 SUBMITTALS § 6.3.1 The Bidder shall,as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents,after notification of selection for the award of a Contract,furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: I .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers,products,and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work;and I .3 names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for the principal portions of the Work. § 6,3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and I responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. AIA Document A701'"—1997.Copyright 01970,1974,1978.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA°' Document,far 5 I any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06118/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1148155183) I 1 I § 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract,the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder.If the 111Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity,the Bidder may,at the Bidder's option, (1)withdraw the Bid or(2)submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution.The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder.In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification,bid security will not be forfeited. § 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder.Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. § 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract,the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. I § 7.1.3 lithe Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources,changes in cost will he adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. § 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS I § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract.If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent,the Bidder shall,prior to commencement of the Work,submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. § 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided,the bonds shall be written on AiA Document A312,Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. § 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. § 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents,the Agreement for the Work will be written on AlA Document 1 Standard norm ofAgreLmentBetween Owner and Contractor Where the-Basis of Payment ls-a- Stipulated Sum. 111 I 1 AIA Document A701'U—1997.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ate Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or 6 any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to the maximum extant possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale, User Notes: (1148155183) i I WINCO FOODS, L.L.C. 03/13 ISUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO MA DOCUMENT 701, 1997 EDITION,"INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS" I In Article 4, paragraph 4.1.1, submit copies of Bid Proposal as noted in the Invitation to Bid. 1 A:dd.to_Article 4 the following: 4.1.8 Do not change the wording of the Bid Form, and do not add words to the wording of the Bid Form. I Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions attached to the proposal shall be cause for rejection of the proposal. I 4.2.1.1 To he considered, proposals must be accompanied by an acceptable security, in an amount not less than five(5) percent of the total amount of the bid. The security may be in the form of a bond,a certified or cashier's check. 1 4.2.3.1 The bidders security will be returned promptly after the owner and the accepted bidder have executed a contract, or, if no award has been made within 30 days after the opening of the bids; upon demand of the bidder at any time thereafter,so long as he has not been notified of the acceptance of his bid. I 4.2.4. A successful bidder who fails to sign the contract for the work or furnish the required bonds within 10 days after he has received notice of the acceptance of his hid, shall forfeit his security deposit. The owner 111 may then award the contract to the next lowest bidder, in which event any excess of he lowest bidder's security over the difference between the lowest and next lowest bids will be returned to the lowest bidder or, if a bidder's bond is used, to the surety. If, upon a forfeiture by the lowest bidder, the owner does not Iaward the contract to the next lowest bidder, the security will be applied toward the planning and bid invitation costs. I4.3.1.1 The mailing envelope containing the bid shall be addressed as follows: Mr. David Van Etten Vice President Construction I WinCo Foods, L.L.0 650 N. Armstrong Place Boise, Idaho 83704 IDelete subparagraph 4.33.4 and substitute the following: I 4.4.5 The bidder shall enclose two copies of A.I.A. Uocument G705 in an envelope which shall be sealed an marked clearly "List of Subcontractors" and with the bidder's name. This envelope shall be submitted with the original Bid Form and Bid Security within 24 hours after the time that the faxed or e-mailed Bid I Form is due. No change shall be made in the List of Subcontractors before or after the award of contract unless agreed to in writing by WinCo Foods, L.L.C. Include where indicated,on the List of Subcontractors, the subcontractor's bonding company. It is the contractor's option to require a bond from the subcontractor. I Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the bidder in writing if either WinCo Foods, L.L.C. or the Architect, after due investigation has reasonable and substantial objection to any person or organization on the list. The bidder may, at his option, withdraw his bid without forfeiture of bid security. I If the bidder submits an acceptable substitute with an increase in his bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, WinCo Foods, L.L.C. may, at its discretion, accept the increased bid price, or it may disqualify the bidder. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SI - 1 I WINCO FOODS, 1..,.1.,.C. 03/13 1 Delete Article 5.1 Add the following new Article 5.1_ 111 5.1 The faxed and/or emailed bids will not be opened and red aloud. The Owner will notify each bidder privately of the results of the bid. Add to Article 5,the following: 5.2.2 Deviation from materials, equipment and systems required by the biddings Documents will disqualify the Bidder and result in rejection of the Bid. Add to Article.? the fo,llgwing 111 7.1.1.1 Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond are required for this project in the amount of 100%of the Contract Amount,and by a surety company authorized to do business in Oregon. Add to Article 8,the following The Contractor shall secure and pay for, on behalf of the owner, all permits and associated fees from all Authority Having Jurisdiction for the construction of the project shown on the Construction Documents. The Contractor shall submit the permit prices with out any markup to the Owner and will be reimbursed within 24 hours. I END OF SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS i I I I I 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SI -2 i I 'I.'?....f.tt-f A Document A310 — 2010 Bid Bond ICONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal place of business) I ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added Information needed for its completion.The author may also I OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) have revised the text of the original AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to II the standard form text is available BOND AMOUNT:$ from the author and should be reviewed.A vertical line in the left PROJECT: margin of this document indicates I (Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above,for the from the original AIA text. I payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves,their heirs,executors, This document has important legal administrators,successors and assigns,jointly and severally,as provided herein.The consequences.Consultation with an conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor attorney is encouraged with respect within the time specified in the bid documents,or within such time period as may be to its completion or modification. I agreed to by the Owner and Contractor,and the Contractor either(I)enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid,and gives such bond or Any singular reference to bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents,with a surety admitted Contractor,Surety,Owner or other II in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner,for the faithful party shall be considered plural performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished where applicable. in the prosecution thereof;or(2)pays to the Owner the difference,not to exceed the amount of this Bond,between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount I for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid,then this obligation shall be null and void,otherwise to remain in full force and effect.The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid.Waiver I of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty(60)days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents,and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60)days. IIf this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor,the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be I deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project,any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or I legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefi•om and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished,the intent is that this Bond shall he construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. I AIA Document A310"—2010.Copyright©1963,1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects.Alt rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Init. Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or an>y 1 111 portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document / was produced by AIA software at 11153:37 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1431524464) I Signed and scaled this day of , (Contractor as Principal) (Seal) 1 (11 itnesw,i (ride) (Surely) (Seal) (Witness) (rifle) I I I I 1 I i 1 I I Inst AIA Document A310"-2010.Copyright©1963,1970 and 2010 by The American Institute at Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING.This Ate Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAc Document,or any 2 portion of ft,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:53:37 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1431524464) 1 I I _ !AIA * Document G7O5TM - 2001 List of Subcontractors IPROJECT:(Name and address) DATE: IIITO ARCHITECT:(Name and address) ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: IFROM CONTRACTOR:(Name and address) CONTRACTOR'S PROJECT NUMBER: i (List Subcontractors and others proposed to be employed on the above Project as required by the bidding documents.) IWork/Firm Name Address/Phone Superintendent I I I I I I I I I AUX Document G705 T41".•2001(formerly G805''-2001).Copyright V 2001 by The American institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale 1 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Lew and lotemational Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any 1 portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible muter the few,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:56:07 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1767075663) I 1 470 Document A101 - 2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year (In words, indicate Clay, month and year.) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has BETWEEN the Owner: added information needed for its (Name, legal status, address and other information) completion.The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be and the Contractor: reviewed.A vertical line in the left (Name, legal status, address and other information) margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. ' This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an for the following Project: attorney is encouraged with respect (Name, location and detailed description) to its completion or modification. AIA Document A201 T"'-2007, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,is adopted in this document by reference.Do not use The Architect: with other general conditions unless (Name, legal status, address and other information) this document Is modified. 1 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. 1 I 1 1 blit AIA Document A101".—2007.Copyright©1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958.1961,1963,1967,1974,1977,1987,1991,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING;This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treatise,Unauthorazed reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and Mil be prosecuted to t the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:58:02 on 12104/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1349936971) 1 I I TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION I 4 CONTRACT SUM 5 PAYMENTS 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement,other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement,all of which form the Contract,and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or oral.An enumeration of the Contract Documents,other than a Modification,appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents,except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall he the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement it'll differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed) If,prior to the commencement of the Work,the Owner requires time to file mortgages and other security interests, the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows: § 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. II § 3,3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than ( )days from the I date of commencement,or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. If appropriate, insert requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the !Fork.) 1 AIA Document A101""—2007.Copyright 0 1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1967,1974,1977,1987,1991,1997 and 2007 by The American init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S,Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 2 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to t the maximum extent possible under the raw.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:58:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06118/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1349936971) I Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date .subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (insert provisions, if any fir liquidated damages relating to failure to achieve Substantial Completion on time or for bonus payments fir early completion of the Work) 111 ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract.The Contract Sum shall be ($ ),subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates,if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: 111 (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If the bidding or proposal documents permit the Owner to accept other alternates subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.) I § 4.3 Unit prices,if any: ' (identify and state the unit price;state quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will he applicable.) Item Units and Limitations Price Per Unit($0.00) § 4.4 Allowances included in the Contract Sum, if any: (Identify allowance and state exclusions, if any,.from the allowance price.) Item Price ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS § 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect,the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the ' Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month,or as follows: 1 § 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, 111 the Owner shall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the day of the month.if an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above,payment shall he made by the Owner not later than ( )days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, slate or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.) § 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work.The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported AIA Document A101'" 2007.Copyright it0 1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961, 1963,1967,1974,1977,1987,1991,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document its protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 3 reproduction or distribution of this AIAe Document,or any portion of ft,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to t the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:58:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1349936971) i 1 such data to substantiate its accuracyas the Architect mayrequire.This schedule,unless objected to by the by q J Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. § 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. § 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract i:)ocuments,the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: .1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum , allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of percent( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of chances in the Work,amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in Section 7.3.9 of AIA Document A201TM-2007,General Conditions of the Contract for Construction; .2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction(or,if approved in advance by the Owner,suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing),less retainage of percent( %); .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner;and .4 Subtract amounts,if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A20I-2007. § 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section 5.1.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: .1 Add,upon Substantial Completion of the Work,a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum,less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work,retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims;and (Section 9.8.5 ofA1A Document 4201 2007 requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.) .2 Add,if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor,any additional amounts payable in accordance with Section 9.10.3 of AIA Document A201-2007. § 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any,shall be as follows: (It'll is intended,prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Sections 5.1.6.1 and 5.1.62 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation) § 5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval,the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. § 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT § 5.2.1 Final payment,constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum,shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201--2007,and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment;and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. § 5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment,or as follows: 1 Init. AIA Document A101'"—2007.Copyright©1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1967,1974,1977,1987,1991,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 4 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document.or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:58:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1349936971) i I ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 6.1 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Architect will serve as Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Section 15.2 of AIA Document A201-2007,unless the parties appoint below another individual,not a party to this Agreement,to serve as Initial Decision Maker. (!f the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the initial Decision 117aker, if other than the Architect.) I 1 § 6.2 BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION For any Claim subject to,but not resolved by,mediation pursuant to Section 15.3 of AIA Document A20I--2007,the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box. If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution below, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.) [ ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AlA Document A201-2007 [ ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction [ ] Other(Specify) I ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of A1A Document A201..2007. § 7,2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201--2007. ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-2007 or another Contract Document,the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. § 8.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below,or in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) oar § 8.3 The Owner's representative: (Name, address and other information) I 1 ' § 8.4 The Contractor's representative: (Name, address and other information) AIA Document A101'"—2007.Copyright ID 1915,1918,1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,1963,1967,1974,1977,1987,1991,1997 and 2007 by The American trait. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 5 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:58:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06118/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1349936971) i I I I I § 8.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall he changed without ten days written notice to the other party. § 8.6 Other provisions: ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 111 § 9.1 The Contract Documents,except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement,are enumerated in the sections below. § 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed ALA Document A101--2007,Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. § 9.1.2 The General Conditions are AIA Document A201-2007,General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. § 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract: I Document Title Date Pages 9.1.4 The Specifications: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Section Title Date Pages § 9.1.5 The Drawings: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) __ -- Number - — — __ Title Date § 9.1.6 The Addenda,if any: Number Date Pages 111 bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding Portions of Addenda relating to btddn b requ e requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. § 9.1.7 Additional documents,if any, forming part of the Contract Documents: i .1 AIA Document E2011M--2007, Digital Data Protocol Exhibit,if completed by the parties,or the following: AIA Document A101'"—2007.Copyright©1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1967,1974,1977,1987.1991,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This A/An' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 6 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:58:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale, User Notes: (1349936971) I I I .2 Other documents,if any,listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents.AM Document 420/ 2007 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should he listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) ARTICLE 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance and provide bonds as set forth in Article 11 of AlA Document A201--2007. (Stale bonding requirements, if any, and limits of liability for insurance required in Article 11 ofAiA Document A201- 2007.) Type of insurance or bond Limit of liability or bond amount($0.00) This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. OWNER(Signature) CONTRACTOR(Signature) (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) I 1 I I 1 I Init. AIA Document A101'"—2007,Copyright C�1915,1918,1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,1963,1967,1974,1977,1987,1991,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA`' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties-Unauthorized 7 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to the maxim nm extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:58:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1349936971) i I i 1AIAOW Document A312'M - 2010 Payment Bond I CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal I place o business) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion.The author may also I have revised the text of the original OWNER: AIA standard form.An Additions and (Nacre, legal status and address) Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT reviewed.A vertical line in the left Date: margin of this document indicates I Amount:$ Description: where the author has added necessary information and where (Name and location) the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. IBOND This document has important legal Date: consequences.Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect (Not earlier than Construction Contract!)ale) to its completion or modification. Amount:$ Any singular reference to Modifications to this Bond: , None See Section 18 Contractor,Surety,Owner or other party shall be considered plural II CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL. SURETY where applicable. Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) I/ Signature: Signature: Name and Name and Title: Title: I (Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Payment Bond) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY.- Name, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: I (Architect, Engineer or other party:) I I I _ AIA Document A312"—2010 Payment Bond.The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING;This Ale Document is protected by Init. U,S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ate Document,or any portion of it,may result in 1 severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software / at 11:59.23 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1212502113) I 1 111 § 1 The Contractor and Surety,jointly and severally, bind themselves,their heirs,executors,administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor,materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract,which is incorporated herein by reference,subject to the following terms. § 2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants,and defends,indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims,demands,liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract,then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond. § 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract,the Surety's obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety(at the address described in Section 13)of claims,demands, liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner's property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor,materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract and tendered defense of such claims,demands,liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety. § 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3,the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense defend,indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim,demand,lien or suit. § 5 The Surety's obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following: I § 5.1 Claimants,who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, .1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor,stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were,or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed,within ninety(90)days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim;and .2 have sent a Claim to the Surety(at the address described in Section 13). § 5.2 Claimants,who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor,have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13). § 6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor,that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant's obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1. § 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2,whichever is applicable,the Surety shall111 promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: § 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant,with a copy to the Owner,within sixty(60)days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed;and § 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. § 7.3 The Surety's failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to -: ,� ,•. ; '. ... . ;. •. to •, ... .. . . _ amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement.If,however,the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2,the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney's fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant. § 8 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond,plus the amount of reasonable attorney's fees provided under Section 7.3,and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. § 9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims,if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond,they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond,subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. Init. AIA Document A312,"—2010 Payment Bond.The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AtA''' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAs Document;or any portion of it,may result in 2 severe civil and crim na!penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:23 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1212502113) I I § 10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner,Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract.The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of I any Claimant under this Bond,and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to,or give notice on behalf of,Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. § 11 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change,including changes of time,to the Construction Contract or to I related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. § 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the I expiration of one year from the date(i)on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2 or 5.2,or(2)on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract,whichever of(1)or(2)first occurs. If the provisions of this I Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. § 13 Notice and Claims to the Surety,the Owner or the Contractor shall he mailed or delivered to the address shown I on the page on which their signature appears.Actual receipt of notice or Claims,however accomplished,shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received. § 14 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where I the construction was to be performed,any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall he deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished,the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. I § 15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond,the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. I § 16 Definitions § 16.1 Claim.A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: .1 the name of the Claimant; .2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done,or materials or equipment furnished; .3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor,materials or equipment was I furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract: .4 a brief description of the labor,materials or equipment furnished; 1 .5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; .6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor,materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim; I .7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant;and .8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor,materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim. I § 16.2 Claimant.An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor,materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract.The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic's lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located.The intent of this Bond III shall be to include without limitation in the terms"labor,materials or equipment"that part of water,gas,power, light,heat,oil,gasoline,telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract,architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may he asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor,materials or equipment were furnished. § 16.3 Construction Contract.The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, Iincluding all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A312' —2010 Payment Bond.The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AleDocument is protected by U.S.Copyright Lawn and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in 3 I severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:23 on 12/04/2014 under Order No,9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1212502113) i or waived to a the Contractor as § 16.4 Owner Default, f ailt •e of the Owner,which has not been reined ed p y required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. § 16.5 Contract Documents.All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 17 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor,the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall he deemed to be Contractor. § 18 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (.Space is provided below fir additional signatures of added parties, other than prose appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address: Address: 1 I I I I I I I I lni4 AIA Document A312r"—2010 Payment Bond.The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S,Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in 4 severe civil and criminal unnaities,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by MA software at 11:59:23 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06118/2015.and is not for resale, User Notes: (1212502113) I I Document A312' — 2010 !AJA Performance Bond I CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Warne, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal I place of business) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion.The author may also 1 OWNER: have revised the text of the original (Name, legal status and address) AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to I the standard form text is available CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT from the author and should be reviewed.A vertical line in the left Date: margin of this document indicates Amount: $ where the author has added Description: necessary information and where (Name and location) the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. I BOND This document has important legal Date: consequences.Consultation with an (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date) attorney is encouraged with respect IAmount:$ to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Modifications to this Bond: None See Section 16 Contractor,Surety,Owner or other party shall be considered plural I CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY where applicable. Company: (Corporate Sea!) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Name and Title: Title: (Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Performance Bond) I (l"OR INFJRMAT ION ONLY- Name, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: I (Architect, Engineer or other party) I I Init. AIA Document A312r'"—2010 Performance Bond.The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U,S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in ,I I severe civil'and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software t at 12'01:03 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1716150839) I l § 1 The Contractor and Surety,jointly and severally, bind themselves,their heirs,executors,administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract,which is incorporated herein by reference. § 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract,the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond,except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3. § 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract,the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after .1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner,Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor's performance. If the Owner does not request a conference,the Surety may,within five(5)business days after receipt of the Owner's notice,request such a conference.If the Surety timely requests a conference,the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise,any conference requested under this Section 3.1 shall be held within ten(10)business days of the Surety's receipt of the Owner's notice.If the Owner,the Contractor and the Surety agree,the Contractor shall he allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract,but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right,if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; .2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default,terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety;and .3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. § 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety's obligations,or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice. § 5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3,the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: § 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor,with the consent of the Owner,to perform and complete the Construction Contract; § 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself,through its agents or independent contractors; § 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract,arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence,to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract,and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default;or § 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete,arrange for completion,or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation,determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and,as soon as practicable after the amount is determined,make payment to the Owner;or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner,citing the reasons for denial. § 6 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness,the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond,and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. lithe Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4,and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability,in whole or in part,without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. I AA Document A312",—2010 Performance Bond.The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected Init. byl U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in 2 severe civil and criminal penatties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,.This document was produced by AlA software at 12:01:03 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. (1716150839) User Notes: 1 I § 7 Ifthe Surety elects to act under Section 5.1,5.2 or 5.3,then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract,and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment I by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price,the Surety is obligated,without duplication,for .1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; I .2 additional legal,design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default,and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5;and .3 liquidated damages,or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract,actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. I § 8 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1,5.3 or 5.4,the Surety's liability is limited to the amount of this Bond. T 1 § 9 he Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract,and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations.No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its Iheirs,executors,administrators,successors and assigns. § 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change,including changes of time,to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 111 § 11 Any proceeding,legal or equitable,under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after I the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond,whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law,the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. I § 12 Notice to the Surety,the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. I § 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed,any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrorn and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein.When so furnished,the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond Iand not as a common law bond. § 14 Definitions § 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price.The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the I Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made,including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled,reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. I § 14.2 Construction Contract.The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. I § 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived,to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract. I § 14.4 Owner Default.Failure of the Owner,which has not been remedied or waived,to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. I § 14.5 Contract Documents.All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. Init AIA Document A312"' 2010 Performance Bond.The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U,S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or dlstributior of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in 3 I severe civil'and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maxlmum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software j at 12:01:03 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1716150839) I I § 15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor,the term Contractor in this Bond shall he deemed to he Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. § 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows: I 111, (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) . CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address: Address: II I I I I I I I I I I _ I Inst. AIA Document A312'"-2010 Performance Bond.The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in 4 severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software t at 12:01:03 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 0611812015,and is not for resale. (1716150839) User Notes: I, I i anee 411/1 Document G707" - 1994 1 Consent Of Surety to Final Payment IPROJECT:(Name and address) ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACT FOR:General Construction ARCHITECT:Q TO OWNER:(Name and address) CONTRACT DATED: CONTRACTOR:EI I SURETY:0 OTHER:❑ + In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above,the (Insert name and address of Surety) 1 ,SURETY, on bond of (Insert name and address of Contractor) I ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor,and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety of any of its obligations to (Insert name and address of Owner) II ,OWNER, as set forth in said Surety's bond. 11 IN WITNESS WI IFRIOF,the Surety has hereunto set its hand on this date: (Insert in writing the month followed by the numeric date and year.) I (Surety) I (Signature of authorized representative) Attest: I (,Seal): (Printed name and title) I I I AIA Document G707'"—1994.Copyright 0 1982 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNMS This AIA Document is protected by LLS Copyright Law and€nternatior¢al Treaties.Unauthorized coproduction or distribution or this Me trocumerit,or any arbor of it,may 1 result;n severe cavil add crlmnnel Penalties,and will he prosecuted to tin.macirrium extent possibte under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:04:37 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1295603243) I NM NEI 'In MIN MIN MI 111111 In am MN MIN INN INN al Inn I 111111 NM allI a NM Document G702" - 1992 , .... Application and Certificate for Payment TO OWNER: PROJECT: APPLICATION NO: Distribution to: PERIOD TO: OWNER: CONTRACT FOR:General Construction ARCHITECT: FROM VIA CONTRACT DATE: CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR: ARCHITECT: PROJECT NOS: it FIELD: OTHER: CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Application is made for paymentas shown below.in connection with the Contract. Contract Documentsthat all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for which previous Continuation Sheet.AIA Document G703,is attached. Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current 1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM S 0.00 payment shown herein is now due. 2. NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDERS $ 0.00 CONTRACTOR: 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE(Line I±2) S 0.00 By: Date: 4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE(Column G on G703) S 0.00 State of: 5. RETAINAGE: County of: a. 0 %of Completed Work Subscribed and sworn to before (Column D-,.Eon G703) S 0.00 me this day of b. 0 %of Stored Material (Column F on 0703) $ 0.00 Notary Public: Total Retainage(Lines 5a±5b or Total in Column I of G703) $ omo My Commission expires: 6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE $ 0,00 ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT (Line 4 Less Line 5 Total) In accordance with the Contract Documents,based on on-site observations and the data comprising 7. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT $ 000 this application,the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the Architect's knowledee, information and belief the Work has progressed as indicated,the quality of the Work is in accordance (Line 6 from prior Certificate) _, with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT 8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE ----***"...'.........-.......... I s 0.0q CERTIFIED. 9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE AMOUNT CERTIFIED S 0.00 (Line 3 less Line 6) $ 0.00 (Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied.Initial all figures on this Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to conform with the amount certified.) CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS ARCHITECT: Total changes approved in previous months by Ov,ner S 0.00 S 0.00 By: Date: Total approved this Month $ 0,00 S 0.00 TOTALS $ 0.00 S 0.00 This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named herein.Issuance.payment and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of NET CHANGES by Change Order $ 0.00 the Owner or Contractor under this Contract. AlA Document D702' —1992.Copyright 9 1953,1963,1965,1971,1978,1983 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects.Alf rights reserved.WARNING:mix A!A Docoweert is protected by US. '7k.peright Law and intrrtal,as UmeNthozod reproddetice e;cIf,rie.edion ut tfus,AM Dootnnerd or any portion of t.. rl';' Neemdt ..5r , dant and nrionnai unnatdoo and'ault hr.?.podsecotod 1 dle rooxinown extl,nt,prnailde under tiro law,This document was produced by AlA software at 13:06:18 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1868855910) MO NM I 1111111 M N = 1 M I E NM I M On M N IIAJA Document G703T" - 1992 Continuation Sheet AIA Document,G702TM-1992,Application and Certification for Payment,or G736TM-2009, APPLICATION NO: Project Application and Project Certificate for Payment,Construction Manager as Adviser Edition, containing Contractor's signed certification is attached. APPLICATION DATE: In tabulations below,amounts are in US dollars. PERIOD TO: Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: 1204 A l B C D E F G I H 1 I WORK COMPLETED TOTAL I MATERIALS ITEM DESCRIPTION OF SCHEDULED FROM PRESENTLY COMPLETED % BALANCE TO RETAINAGE(TF NO, WORK VALUE PREVIOUS THIS PERIOD STORED AND STORED TO (G÷C) FINISH VARIABLE APPLICATION DATE (D+E) (NOT IN D OR E) (D±E=F) (C-Cr) RATE) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.001 0.00 0.00 0.001 0.00 0.00 0.00%1 0.00 0.00' 0.00 0.00O.00J 0.00 0.00 0.00%I 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.001 0.00 0.00 0.00%j 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.001 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00_ 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.001 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.001 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00' 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00j 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00' 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 GRAND TOTAL $0.00 $0.00 $0.001 $0.00 $0.00 0.00% $0.00' $0.00 AIA Document GMT"' 1992.Copyright C 1963,1965.1966,1967,1970,1978,1983 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects.AU rights reserved.WARNING'This AIA' Dcrc€€!rssrer is protected ct S Copyright Law and internabainal Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction o,distribution ofthis iA`U F ,. v..t,c,,rite, -r:.,n of iv r i ut d �.. gnd rt,Indy result 6r_yogi ,.x and o r= ,a s dud,t re prosecuted tzry ,� n',11:, re r tCnf p� rEst under the Ea This document was produced by AIA software at 13:07:57 on 12104/2014 under Order No.995027906Q 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (727282003) I I 'Ir—.0 AT ,N,V,/i ,A.4," 0 A Document G706T" — 1994 i Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims IPROJECT:(Name and address) ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER:0 ARCHITECT:C] CONTRACT FOR:General Construction CONTRACTOR:1:1 I TO OWNER:(Name and address) CONTRACT DATED: SURETY:0 OTHER:0 I STATE OF: COUNTY OF: The undersigned hereby certifies that,except as listed below,payment has been made in full and all obligations have I otherwise been satisfied for all materials and equipment furnished,for all work,labor,and services performed,and for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor for damages arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above for which the Owner or Owner's property might in any way be held I responsible or encumbered. EXCEPTIONS: I SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. Whenever CONTRACTOR: (Name and address) Surety is involved,Consent of Surety is I required. AlA Document G707,Consent of Surety,may be used for this purpose Indicate Attachment 0 Yes El No IBY: The following supporting documents should be attached (Signature of authorized representative) hereto if required by the Owner: II. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens, conditional upon receipt of final payment. (Printed name and title) I2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from Subscribed and sworn to before me on this date: Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers,to the extent required by the Owner, accompanied by a list thereof I3. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens(AIA Notary Public: My Commission Expires: Document G706A). I I I AlA Document G7013"—1994.Copyright©1970 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects,All rights reserved.WARNING:Thin Ate Document is I protentcd by U.S,Copyright Law and Internation:e Treaties.Unoultionzed reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or soy portion of it,may 1 result in sovera nivil and crinlinai penalties,and will be.prosecuted to the maximum 050 ii possible wider the law.This document was produced by ASA software at 13:09:09 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. user Notes: (825311799) I 1 1AJA M Document G706ATM - 1994 Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens ' PROJECT:(Name and address) ARCHITECT'S PROJECT OWNER: NUMBER: ARCHITECT:El CONTRACT FOR:General CONTRACTOR:❑ Construction SURETY:❑ TO OWNER:(Name and address) CONTRACT DATED: OTHER:❑ -.... STATE OF: COUNTY OF: The undersigned hereby certifies that to the best of the undersigned's knowledge, information and belief,except as listed below,the Releases or Waivers of Lien attached hereto include the Contractor,all Subcontractors,all suppliers of materials and equipment,and all performers of Work, labor or services who have or may have liens or encumbrances or the right to assert liens or encumbrances against any property of the Owner arising in any manner out of the performance of the Contract referenced above. EXCEPTIONS: SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: CONTRACTOR: (Name and address) ' 1. Contractor's Release or Waiver of l.,iens, conditional upon receipt of final payment. 2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from BY: Subcontractors and material and equipment (Signature o authorizedsuppliers,to the extent required by the Owner, representative) accompanied by a list thereof. (Printed name and title) Subscribed and sworn to before me on this date: ' Notary Public: My Commission Expires: 1 1 1 1 AIA Document G706A" —1994.Copyright 10 1982 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA''Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or di,tribution of this Ale Document<or any portion of it,may .� rrsuft in nevem civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:10:08 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1982805075) 1 I I IIAIADocument A201 . . 2007 I General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 1 for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) I ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has THE OWNER: added information needed for its completion.The author may also I (Name, legal statics and address) have revised the text of the original AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to I THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates I TABLE OF ARTICLES where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS from the original AIA text. I2 OWNER This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an 3 CONTRACTOR attorney is encouraged with respect I to its completion or modification. 4 ARCHITECT I 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS I 8 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME I 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY I 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK I 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT I15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES I AIA Document A201 T"—2007.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ate Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized 1 I t reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of IL may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/0412014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06118/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I I INDEX Architect's Additional Services and Expenses (Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.) 2.4, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1,, 13.5,2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 3.1.3,4.2,3.7.4, 15.2,9.4.1,9.5 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Approvals 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,4.2.7 I Acceptance of Work Architect's Authority to Reject Work 9.6.6,9.82,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 3.5,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Access to Work Architect's Copyright 3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 1.1.7, 1.5 Accident Prevention Architect's Decisions 10 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2,7.4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.2.14,6.3, Acts and Omissions 7.3,7,7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4.1,9.5,9.8.4,9.9.1, 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,8.3.1,9.5,1, 10.2.5, 13.5.2, 15 2, 15.3 10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Architect's Inspections Addenda 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3.9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 1.1.1,3.11 Architect's Instructions I Additional Costs,Claims for 3.2.4,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2,7, 13.5.2 3.7.4,3.7.5,6.1.1,7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4 Architect's Interpretations Additional Inspections and Testing 4,2.11,4.2.12 9.4.2,9.8.3, 12.2.1,13.5 Architect's Project Representative Additional Insured 4.2.10 11.1.4 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Time,Claims for 1.1.2, 1.5,3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5, 3.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,8.3.2, 15.1.5 3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.9,3,3.10,3.1 1,3.12,3.16,3.18, I Administration of the Contract 4.1.2,4.I.3,42,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5, 3.1.3,4.2,9.4,9.5 9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 15.2 I 1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11,3,7 4.2.13 Architect's Representations Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 I 3.8,7.3.8 Architect's Site Visits Al-risk Insurance 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 11.3.1, 11.3.1.1 Asbestos Applications for Payment 10.3.1 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7,9.10, Attorneys' Fees 11.1.3 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3 Approvals Award of Separate Contracts 2.1.1,2.2.2,2.4,3.1.3,3.10.2,3.12.8,3.12.9,3.12.10, 6.1.1,6.1.2 I 4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.5.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Arbitration Portions nTthe Work 8.3,1, 11.3.10, 111, 15.3,2, 15.4 5.2 ARCHITECT Basic Definitions 4 1.1 Architect,Definition of Bidding Requirements 4.1.1 1.1.1 5.2.1, 11.4.1 I Architect,Extent of Authority Binding Dispute Resolution 2.4,3,12.7,4,1,4.2,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.7,7.4,9.2, 9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13,1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.8,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance Architect,Limitations of Authority and 11.3.2 Responsibility Bonds,Lien 2.1,1,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4,2,1,4.2.2, 7.3.7.4,9.10.2,9.10.3 4,2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,5.2.1,7.4, Bonds,Performance,and Payment I 9.4.2,9.5.3,9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2 7.3.7.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Init. AIA Document A201 T'"-2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:'This Ale Document is protected by U.S,Copyright Law end International Treaties.Unauthorized 2 rmprodua:tdon or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil end criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AlA software at 13:13:02 on 12104/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I Building Permit Completion, Substantial 3.7.1 4.2.9,8.1,1,8.1. 3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, I Capitalization 1.3 12.2, 13.7 Compliance with Laws Certificate of Substantial Completion 1.6,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, I Certificates for Payment 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 4.2.1,4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7, Concealed or Unknown Conditions 9.10.1,9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3 3.7.4,4.2.8,8.3,1, 10.3 Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval Conditions of the Contract I 13.5.4 1.1.1,6.1.1,G1.4 Certificates of Insurance Consent,Written 9.10.2, 11.1.3 3.4.2,3.7.4,3.12,8,3.14,2,4,1.2,9.3.2,9.8.5,9.9.1, I Change Orders 9.10.2,9.10.3, 1 1.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 1.1,1,2.4,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.8.2.3,3.1l,3.12.8,4.2.8, Consolidation or Joinder 5.2,3,7.1.2,7.1.3,7.2,7.3.2,7.3.6,7.3.9,7.3.10, 15.4.4 8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY I 12.1.2, 15.1.3 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Change Orders,Definition of 1,1,4,6 7.2.1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1 I 2.2.1,3.11,4.2.8,7,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1, Construction Change Directives 11.3.9 l.1.1,3.4.2,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1.1,7.1.2,7.1.3,7.3, Claims,Definition of 9.3.1.1 15.1.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's I CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 3.2.4,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.9,9.3.3,9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 5.4, 14.2.2,2 15.4.1 Continuing Contract Performance I Claims for Additional Cost 15.1.3 3.2.4,3.7.4,6.1.1,7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4 Contract,Definition of Claims for Additional Time 1.1.2 3.2.4,3.7.4,6.1.1,8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR I Concealed or Unknown Conditions,Claims for SUSPENSION OF THE 3.7.4 5.4.1.1, 1 1.3.9, 14 Claims for Damages Contract Administration I 3.2.4,3,18,6.1.1,8.3,3,9,5,1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating Claims Subject to Arbitration to 15.3.1, 15.4.1 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 I Cleaning Up Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of 3.15,6.3 1.5.2,2.2.5,5.3 Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to Contract Documents,Definition of 2.2.1,3.2,2,3.4.1,3,7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,5,2.1,5,2.3, 1.1,1 I 6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1, 15.1.4 Contract Sum 3.7.4,3.8,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2,9.5.1.4, Commencement of the Work,Definition of 9.6.7,9.7, 10.3,2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4, I8.1.2 15.2.5 Communications Facilitating Contract Contract Sum,Definition of Administration 9.1 3.9.1,4.2.4 Contract Time I Completion,Conditions Relating to 3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3.1,7,3.5,7.4, 8.1.1,8.2.1,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 15.1.5.1, 15.2.5 COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND Contract Time,Definition of I9 8.1.1 AIA Document A201'M—2007.Copyright Q9 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Iinit. Institute of Architects.Alt rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties<Unauthorized 3 reproduction or distribution of this Ate Docu€raant,or any portion of it,may result it severe civil and criminal penalties,and wilt be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/0412014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I CONTRACTOR Costs 3 2.4,3.2.4,3.7.3,3,8.2,3.15.2,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, Contractor,Definition of 7.3.3.3,7.3.7,7,3.8,7.3.9,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, '' 3.1,6.1.2 11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Contractor's Construction Schedules Cutting and Patching 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 3.14,6.2.5 Contractor's Employees Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate I 3.3.2,3,4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, Contractors 11.1.1. 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 3.14.2,6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2,5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3, Contractor's Liability Insurance 12.2.4 11.1 Damage to the Work Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.3.1, 12.2.4 and Owner's Forces Damages,Claims for 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 3.2.4,3.18,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, I Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, Damages for Delay 11.3.1,2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of I 1.1.2, 1.5,3.1,3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5, 8.1.2 3,7.4,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.3,4.2,5.2, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of 6.2.2,7, 8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9,7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 8.1.3 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1 Day,Definition of I Contractor's Representations 8.1.4 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.5.3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 Decisions of the Architect Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,15.2,6.3, I Work 7.3.7,7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 3.3.2,3.18,5.3,6.1.3,6.2,9.5.1, 10.2.8 13.5.2, 14.2.2,14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification 3.2 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14,1.1.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, 9,7 Rejection and Correction of Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5,1,9.5.2,9.6.6,9.8.2, 14.1, 15.1.6 9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1 I Contractor's Submittals Definitions 3.10,3.11,3.12.4,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,9.2,9.3,9.8.2, 1.1,2.1.1,3.1.1,3.5,3.12,1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, 9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1,3, 1 1.4.2 15.1.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.1,9.1,9.8.1 Contractor's Superintendent Delays and Extensions of Time I 3.9. 10.2.6 3.2,3.7.4,5,2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, Contractor's Supervision and Construction 10,3.2, 10.4, 14,3.2, 15.1.5, 15,2.5 Procedures Disputes 1.2.2,3,3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, 6.3,7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 I 7.1.3,7.3.5,7.3.7,8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Documents and Samples at the Site -Contra Liaibilit ranee 3.11 11.1.1.8, 11.2 Drawings,Definition of Cooration and 1.1.511 1 2,3.2.1din ,3.3.1,3Correlation.10,3.12.6, 6.1.3,6.2.1 Drawings and Specifications.Use and Ownership of Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 3,11 1.5,2.2.5,3.11 Effective Date of Insurance Copyrights 8.2.2, 11.1.2 1.5,3.17 Emergencies Correction of Work 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4 2.3,2.4,3.7.3,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2 Employees,Contractor's I Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 1.2 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 142.1,1 Cost,Definition of 7.3.7 I AIA Document A201"A—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized 4 reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or any portion of it,may result to severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to I the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015.and is not for resale. User Notes; (1281774422) I I IEquipment, Labor,Materials or Instruments of Service,Definition e tnttlon of 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 1.1.7 I 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.7,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, Insurance 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.7,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 11 Execution and Progress of the Work Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3.1,3.4.1,3.5, 11.3.2 I3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12,3.14,4.2,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.5,8.2, Insurance,Contractor's Liability9.5.1,9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3 11.1 Extensions of Time Insurance,Effective Date of 3.2,4,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 8.2.2, 11.1.2 I 10.4, 14.3, 15,1.5, 15.2.5 Insurance,Loss of Use Failure of Payment 11.3.3 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2,13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Insurance,Owner's Liability I Faulty Work 11.2 (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance,Property Final Completion and Final Payment 10.2.5,11.3 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, Insurance,Stored Materials I 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 9.3.2 Financial Arrangements,Owner's INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 11 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy I 11.3.1.1 9.9.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Intent of the Contract Documents I 1,2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 Governing Law Interest I 13.1 13.6 Guarantees(See Warranty) Interpretation Hazardous Materials 1.2,3, 1.4,4.1.1,5.1,6.1.2, 15.1.1 10.2.4, 10.3 Interpretations,Written I Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 4.2.11,4.2.12, 15.1.4 5.2.1 Judgment on Final Award Indemnification 15.4.2 I 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2, Labor and Materials,Equipment 11.3.7 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8,2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, Information and Services Required of the Owner 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.7,9.32,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.2,3.12.4,3.12.10,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 I 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, Labor Disputes 13.5.2,14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 8.3.1 Initial Decision Laws and Regulations 15.2 1.5,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,9.6.4,9.9.1, I Initial Decision Maker,Definition of 1.1.8 10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Initial Decision Maker,Decisions Liens 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1. 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, I5.2.5 2.1.2,9.3.3,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 I Initial Decision Maker,Extent of Authority Limitations,Statutes of 14.2.2, 14.2,4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1 15.2.5 Limitations of Liability I Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 2.3,3.2.2,3.5,3.12.10,3.17,3.18.1,4.2.6,4.2.7, 4.2.12,6.2.2,9,4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, Inspections 11.1.2,11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4,2,6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3, Limitations of Time I 9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15,1,4.2.7, Instructions to Bidders 5.2,5.3,5.4.1,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, 1.1.1 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5, Instructions to the Contractor 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15 I 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.8.1,5.2.1,7,8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2 Loss of Use Insurance 11.3.3 AIA Document A201'M-2007.Copyright @ 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American I /nit. Institute of Architects.Alf rights reserved.WARNING:This Ate Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized 5 reproduction or distribution ofthis AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and win be prosecuted to / the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I Owner, Information and Services Required of the I Material Suppliersq 1.5,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.2,3.12.10,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2, Materials,Hazardous 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 10.2,4, 10.3 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Materials,Labor,Equipment and Owner's Authority 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1,3.4.1,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13, 1.5,2.1.1,2.3,2.4,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2,4.1.2, 3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2,7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.7,9.3.2,9.3.3, 4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1,6.1,6.3,7.2.1, 9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2,4, 14.2.1.1, 14 2,1.2 7,3.1,82.2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1,9.6.4,9.9.1, Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, 12.3, Procedures of Construction 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 Owner's Financial Capability , Mechanic's Lien 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 2.1,2, 15,2.8 Owner's Liability Insurance Mediation 11.2 8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 15.4.1 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1,7.4 2.4, 14.2.2 I MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Clean Up 13 6.3 Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.1 Award Separate Contracts Modifications to the Contract 6.1 1.1.1, 1.1.2,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1,9.7, Owner's Right to Stop the Work 10.3.2, 11.3.1 2.3 Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Suspend the Work I 6.2 14.3 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 14.2 I Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications 2,3,2.4, 3.5,4.2,6,6.2.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, and Other Instruments of Service 12.2.1 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5,2.2.5,3.2.2,3.11,3.17,4.2.12, Notice 5.3 I 2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.12.9,5.2.1,9.7, Partial Occupancy or Use 9.10, 102.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 9.6.6,9.9, 11.3.1.5 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15,4.1 Patching,Cutting and Notice,Written 3.14,6.2.5 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9.2,3.12.9,3.12.10,5.2,1,9.7,9.10, Patents 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14, 15.2.8, 3.17 15.4.1 Payment,Applications for Notice of Claims 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.7,9.8.5,9.10.1, I 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2. 15.4 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 .. _. .. Payment,Certificates 6r� 13.5.1, 13.5.2 - 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7,9.10.1, Observations,Contractor's 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 I 3.2,3.7.4 Payment,Failure of Occupancy 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.3.1.5 Payment,Final Orders,Written 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.82,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3, 1.1.1,2.3,3.92,7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 13.5.2, 14.3.1 Payment Bond,Performance Bond and OWNER 7.3.7.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4 2 Payments,Progress Owner,Definition of 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1,3 2.1.1 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 I Init. AIA Document A201""—2007.Copyright C 1911,1915,1918.1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.Alf rights reserved.WARNING::This AIAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law end International Treaties,Unauthorized 6 reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe cavil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to i t the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 111 I IPayments to Subcontractors Rights and Remedies 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5,3.7.4,3.15.2,42.6,5.3,5.4,6.1, I PCB 6.3, 7.3,1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 10.3.1 13.4, 14, 15.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 7.3.7.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4 3.17 I Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws Rules and Notices for Arbitration 2.2.2,3,7,3.13,7.3.7.4, 10.2.2 15.4.1 PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION Safety of Persons and Property OF 10.2, 10,4 I 10 Safety Precautions and Programs Polychlorinated Biphenyl 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 10.3.1 Samples,Definition of I Product Data,Definition of 3.12.3 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Samples,Shop Drawings,Product.Data and 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Samples at the Site,Documents and I Progress and Completion 3.11 4.2.2,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Schedule of Values Progress Payments 9.2,9.3.1 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 Schedules,Construction I Project,Definition of 1.1.4 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors Project Representatives 1.1.4,3.12.5,3,14.2,4.2,4,4.2.7,6,8.3.1, 12,1.2 4.2,10 Shop Drawings,Definition of I Property Insurance 3.12.1 10.2.5, 11.3 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 10 Site,Use of I Regulations and Laws 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 1.5,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,9.6.4,9.9.1, Site Inspections 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 3.2.2,3.3.3,3.7.1,3.7.4,4.2,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5 I 15.2.8, 15.4 Site Visits,Architect's Rejection of Work 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4,2,9.5.1,9.9.2, 9,10.1, 13.5 3.5,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Special Inspections and Testing Releases and Waivers of Liens 4,2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 I 9.10,2 Specifications,Definition of Representations 1.1.6 3.2.1,3.5,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3,3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Specifications 9.8.2,9,10.1 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1,5,3.11,3.12,10,3.17,4.2,14 I Representatives Statute of Limitations 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.2,4.2.10,5.1.1, 13,7, 15.4.1.1 5.1.2, 13.2.1 Stopping the Work Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 2.3,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 I 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,5.3,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 Stored Materials Retainage 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9,9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Subcontractor,Definition of Review of Contract Documents and Field 5.1.1 I Conditions by Contractor SUBCONTRACTORS3.2,3.12.7,6,1.3 5 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Subcontractors,Work by I Architect 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 9.6.7 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and Subcontractual Relations Samples by Contractor 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9,10, 10.2,1, 14.1, 14.2.1 I 3.12 snit. AIA Document A201'1'1-2007.Copyright 0 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Iinstitute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by LLS.Copyright Law and intermtioni Treaties,Unauthorized 7 reproduction or distribution of this Aldan' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and Will ho prosecuted to f the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18(2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I 111 Submittals 'rests and Inspections 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2,7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.7,9.2,9.3, 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2, 9.8,9.9,1,9.10.2,9,10.3, 11.1.3 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 I Submittal Schedule TIME 3.10.2,3.12.5,4.2.7 8 Subrogation,Waivers of Time,Delays and Extensions of 6.1.1, 11.3.7 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7,4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, Substantial Completion 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Time Limits 12.2, 13.7 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.2,3.10, 3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2, Substantial Completion,Definition of 5.2, 5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9,3.1,9.3.3, 9.8.1 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 1 1.1.3, 12.2, 13.5, Substitution of Subcontractors 13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4 5.2.3,5.2.4 Time Limits on Claims , Substitution of Architect 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2 4.1.3 'Title to Work Substitutions of Materials 9.3.2,9.3.3 3.4.2,3.5,7.3.8 Transmission of Data in Digital Form Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 1.6 5.1.2 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF Subsurface Conditions WORK 3.7.4 12 I Successors and Assigns Uncovering of Work 13.2 12.1 Superintendent Unforeseen Conditions,Concealed or Unknown I 3.9, 10.2.6 3.7.4,8.3.1, 10.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures Unit Prices 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2.4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2,4, 7.3.3.2,7.3.4 7.1.3,7.3.7,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Use of Documents I Surety 1.1.1, 1.5,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Use of Site Surety,Consent of 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 9.10.2,9.10.3 Values,Schedule of I Surveys 9.2,9.3.1 2.2.3 Waiver of Claims by the Architect Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 13.4.2 14.3 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor Suspension of the Work 9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6 5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Claims by the Owner Suspension or Termination of the Contract 9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 5.4.1.1, 14 Waiver of Consequential Damages 'Taxes 14.2.4, 15.1.6 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.7.4 Waiver of Liens_ Termination by the Contractor 9.10.2,9.10.4 14.1, 15.1.6 Waivers of Subrogation I Termination by the Owner for Cause 6.1.1, 11.3.7 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6 Warranty 'termination by the Owner for Convenience 3.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7 I 14.4 Weather Delays Termination of the Architect 15.1.5.2 4.1.3 Work,Definition of Termination of the Contractor 1.1.3 I 14.2.2 Written Consent TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF'I'lIE 1.5.2,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.3.2,9.8.5, CONTRACT 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 14 Written Interpretations I 4.2.11,4.2.12 AIA Document A201",—2007.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 8 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to I the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I ' Written Notice Written Orders 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,5,2.1, 8.2.2,9.7, 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,7,8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1, ' 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 1 1.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.1.2 15,4.1 1 i r I I 1 i I I AIA Document A201 r"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 9 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,.may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to ( the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/1812015.and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I I ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS § 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement)and consist of the Agreement,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is(I)a written amendment I to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals,the Contractor's bid or proposal,or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements. § 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT I The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,(2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants or(4)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 111 § 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by I the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 THE PROJECT I The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors. § 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS I The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules and diagrams. § 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations,in any medium of expression now known or later developed,of the tat •' : ' T . e wed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their -- respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include,without limitation,studies, surveys, models,sketches,drawings,specifications,and other similar materials. I § 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in I accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2. § 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.l'he Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. I Init. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961.1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 10 reproduction or distribution of this Atte Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 1 § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,andDrawings c cs, arrangement of Drawmis shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be ' performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are(I)specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American institute of Architects. § 1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all"and "any"and ' articles such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE § 1,5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications,and will retain all common law,statutory and other reserved rights,including copyrights.'the Contractor,Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to ' meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to ' use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any,shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor,Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants. § 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM lithe parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions,unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents. ' ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term "Owner"means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, ' usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. § 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work,the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Thereafter,the Contractor may only request such evidence if(I)the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require;(2)a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum;or(3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright 41911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 11 ' reproduction or distribution of this MAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AMA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 1 material change.After the Owner furnishes the evidence,the Owner shall not I the portion of the Work affected by a �to b materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, 1 including those required under Section 3.7.1,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements, assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. I § 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the 111Work. § 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness.The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services. § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract.Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK I If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part III of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such deficiencies.In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the I Architect.if payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 GENERAL § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout-the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract.The term "Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. I § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. I AIA Document A201"—2007.Copyright 9 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.lNARN1NG:This AlA Document is protected by U.S,Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 12 reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to I the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. (1281774422) User Notes: I 111 § 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, I become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary,the Contractor shall,before starting each portion of the I Work,carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work,and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the I purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the I Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable I laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. I § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been I avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.If the Contractor performs those obligations,the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents,or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES I § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for,and have control over,construction means,methods,techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific I instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall he fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means, methods,techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the I Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect.If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means,methods,techniques,sequences Ior procedures. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, ISubcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for,or on behalf of,the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that Isuch portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, Imaterials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat, utilities,transportation,and other Inst AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright 0 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA''" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 13 reproduction or distribution or this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale, User Notes: (1281774422) I h I e facquipilitimes ent andnot servcoincesformneingcesstoary these for proper remexecutientsmonay anbed conscompidereletionddoeffthe Wective.orkTh,e whet c tContractorr p oras y p and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections I 3.12.8 or 7.4,the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,Mier evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons can•ying out the Work.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them, , § 3.5 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise.The Contractor further , warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit.Work,materials,or em'swarrantyorexclermaneudesnt remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.6 TAXES I 'I'he Contractor shall pay sales, consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits,fees, licenses,and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances, codes, I rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are(I) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,that differ materially from those ordinarily • . , ••• recagai ed-as inherent in ronstruc'tion activities of the character provided for-in-the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly an increase or I investigate such conditions and,if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for, performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.I f the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation,that party may proceed as provided in Article 15. I § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work,the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers,archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice,the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume AIA Document A201 Tu—2007.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958, 1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by LLS.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 14 reproduction or distribution of this AlA5 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be prosecuted to f the maximum extent possible under the low.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 0611812015.and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 the operations.The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the ' Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable I objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and ' all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;and .3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(I)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall he selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent.The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating(1)whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or(2)that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply ' within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. § 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES § 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. § 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule,promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule,and shall submit the schedule(s)for the Architect's approval. 1 The Architect's approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld.The submittal schedule shall(1)be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule,and(2)allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.if the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule,the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. 1 AIA Document A201"—2007.Copyright W 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961.1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING.This A#A" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 15 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to r the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06118/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 § 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings,Specifications,Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction,and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples and similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed, § 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. ' § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has(1)reviewed and approved them,(2)determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so and(3)checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal111 and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved 1111 of responsibility-for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the absence of such written notice,the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12,10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be [nit. AIA Document A201,"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 16 reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) required to provide professional services in violation of applicable pp cable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations, specifications,certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the services,certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor ' shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents. § 3.13 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. ' § 315 CLEANING UP § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools, construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. § 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents,or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent,the Contractor shall he responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. !nit. ALA Document A201'M—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.An rights reserved.WARNING:This Ate Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and rnternatlonal Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to 1 T the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software al 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 I § 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION § 3.18.1 'Co the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages, I losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible properly(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. 1 § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be I liable,the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts,disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT I § 4.1 GENERAL § 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not he unreasonably withheld. § 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom I the Contractor'has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT I § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction,or as otherwise agreed with the Owner,to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will not be required to ____ _ . .. ... . ,. 'i • .,- ' inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.=l'he Architect-will not have control over,charge of,or responsibility for,the construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the I Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,except as provided in Section 3.3.1. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits,the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,and report to the Owner(1)known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor,and(2)defects and deficiencies observed in the Work.The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or I charge of and will riot be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. I Inst. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 18 reproduction or distribution of this AIA"' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to r the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. (1281774422) User Notes: I § 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect.Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with separate contractors shall he through the Owner. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or completed. However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor,Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve,or take other appropriate action upon,the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be M taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for ' installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means,methods, techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. ' § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8;receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section I 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of ' such project representatives shall he as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under,and requirements of,the ' Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will he consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from,the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of'drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American unit, Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 19 reproduction or distribution of this AIAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 I I § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with , reasonable promptness.If appropriate,the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS I§ 5.1 DEFINITIONS § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term "Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term "Subcontractor" I does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to , perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. § 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) Iproposed for each principal portion of the Work.The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating(1)whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or(2)that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. I § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but I rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. I §-5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner. Where appropriate,the I Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may Init. AIA Document A201"'—2007.Copyright f9 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U,S,Copyright Law and international Treaties,Unauthorized 20 reproduction or distribution of this AlA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to f the maximum extent passible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 0611812015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I be at variance with the Contract Documents.Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. I § 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner,provided that I .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing:and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any,obligated under bond relating to the . I Contract, When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement,the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligations under the subcontract. I § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. I § 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4,the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the Isubcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those ill portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. if the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations I on the site,the term "Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate I contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules.The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner until Isubsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations I and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract,including, without excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, i i and 12. § 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY I § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents, I § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable I for such proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that !nit AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American IInstitute of Architects.Ail rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized l reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to 21 the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I i the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 1 § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because oldie Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor's delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP ill Ufa dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 GENERAL § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and Architect;a Construction I Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may he issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS I § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Std;and .3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES X7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directint,a-change-in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in-the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions,the I Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 if the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: I .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump suns properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or AIA Document A201'm—2007.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized 22 reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to / the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: 11281774422) 1 1 .4 As provided in Section 7,3.7. ' § 7.3.4 If unit prices arc stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of-Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.7 ifthe Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement,or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement,a reasonable amount.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor, including social security,old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers'compensation insurance; .2 Costs of materials,supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the Work;and ' ,5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall he actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and ' credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 fending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect's professional judgment,to be reasonably justified.The Architect's interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,such ' agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order.Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.Such changes will he effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. i AIA Document A2011"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects,All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 23 reproduction or distribution of this AIAe Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279000 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: {1281774422) 1 I ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINITIONS § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in , the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The elate of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. I § 8.1.4 The term "day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. I § 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not he changed by the effective date of such insurance. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of111 the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner;or by changes ordered in the Work;or by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control;or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration;or by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. I § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 1 § 9.1 CONTRACT SUM . The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. —§-91-SCHEDULE 2-SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment,a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the I various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. ill § 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2,for completed portions of the Work.Such application shall he notarized, if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers,and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. I AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright @ 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970.1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING.This AlA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 24 reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to f the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12104/2014 tinder Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 I I § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the IArchitect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been performed by Iothers whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall he made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance I by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable I insurance,storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner I no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief', be free and clear of liens,claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or Ientities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. I § 9,4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief,the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations arc subject to I an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further I constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means,methods, techniques, sequences or procedures,(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material I suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. I § 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or ill part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the I Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of I subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of .1 defective Work not remedied; I .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; trait. AIA Document A201""—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA°1 Document is protected by U.S,Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 25 I reproduction or distribution of this AIA6 Document,or any portion of it,may resuti in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly y to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; I .5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or I.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. I § 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3,the Owner may,at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check,the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment. § 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS I § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the , Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar I manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will,on request, furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days,the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid.Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor,except as may otherwise be I required by law. § 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 1 § 16,6 A Certificate for Payment,a-progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by-the- Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding Init. A1A Document A201'"—2007.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized 26 reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and wilt be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I dispute resolution,then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall he extended I appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION I § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 1 § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the Iresponsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not I included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to Idetermine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish I responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall he submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if I any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof, Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented I to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided I the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any,security,maintenance,heat, utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and I submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. I § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. I § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. I Init. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2.007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized 27 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law_This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 § 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10,2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment and(5), if required by the Owner,other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. § 9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously xnade in writing and identified-byihat payee as-unsettled at— the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 111 § 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall he responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may he affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors;and AIA Document A201 —2007.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U,S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 28 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13,13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/1812015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I .3 other propertyat the site or thereto,such as adjacent trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements, roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction. § 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities hearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are ' necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor,The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part oldie construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. § 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY if either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition,immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor's written notice,the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor,By Change Order,the Contract Time shall be Inst AIA Document A201 t°—2007.Copyright 0 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970.1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.Ali rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 29 reproduction or distribution of this AIRF Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 0611612015.and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 M extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or111 death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),except to the extent that such damage,loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents.The Owner shall he responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents,except to the extent of the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs(I)for remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles,or(2)where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1,except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 lt;without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable by a government agency 111 for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 EMERGENCIES I In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. I ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations and completed operations under the d ch the Contractor may he legally liable, whether such operations by ntab a SuContractbcontractoranorfor bywhianyone directly or indirectly employed by any ofthem,or by anyonebe for whosetheCoactrs anyctor or ofy them may be liable: .1 Claims under workers' compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. § 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater. Coverages,whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Inrt. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING.:This Ale Document Is protected by U,S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 30 reproduction or distribution of this Tile Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent passible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06118,2015,and is not for resale. (1281774422) User Notes: I I Work k until the date of final payment andtermination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and,with respect to the Contractor's completed operations coverage,until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance.These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage,including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2.Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid tinder the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. ' § 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include(1)the Owner,the Architect and the Architect's consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor's operations;and(2)the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor's completed operations. § 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. § 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner,the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. I § 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall he on an "all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall include,without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. § 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or 111 maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall hear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. § 11.3.1.3 if the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. § 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit. Inst AIA Document A201 T"—2007.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925, 1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.Al)rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 31 reproduction or distribution of this Aie Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by MA software at 13:13.02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company § 11.3.1.5 Partial artlal occupancy p Y or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall,without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. § 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. § 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss I of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. § 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. § 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or 1 adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or i f ailer final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All II separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. § 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3.Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions,definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. § 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(I)each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the other,and(2)the Architect, Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors describedin Article 6, 'fluty,and the subrontratlors sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10.The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. I A1A Document A201''—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 32 reproductionur distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may resent in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to f the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I 111 § 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received,which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. § 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties 1 in interest shall object in writing within five clays after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. if the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or,in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators. § 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. § 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential benefciary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must, if requested in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination and he replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall he uncovered by the Contractor. if such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. § 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections,the cost of uncovering and replacement,and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition,The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct Init. AIA Document A201,"—2007.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects,All rights reserved.WARNING:This Aie Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 33 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect.the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,whether completed or partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS '. § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that,if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. 1 § 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. I f either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. _ .ay,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to a lender providing construction— financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. I § 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual,to a member of the firm or entity,or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended;or if delivered at,or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to,the last business address known to the party giving notice. § 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall he in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law, I Inst AIA Document A2011"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987.1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and Intrarnationat Treaties.Unauthorized 34 reproduction or distribution of this AtA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 I 13.4.2 No action or failure a we to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a Ibreach there under,except as may be specifically agreed in writing. § 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests,inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract I Documents and by applicable laws, statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall hear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect I timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may he present for such procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of(1)tests,inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded,and(2)tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or Iapplicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. § 13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1,the Architect will, upon written I authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. I § 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses Ishall be at the Contractor's expense. § 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. I § 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. I § 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. I § 13.6 INTEREST Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. I § 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action,whether in contract,tort,breach of warranty or otherwise,against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements I of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7. I ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days I through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for any of the following reasons; .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to Ihe stopped; Init. AlA Document A2019"—2007.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.Aa rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA6 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 35 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to / the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I 1 mer gent that requires all Work to be .2 An act of government,.such as a declaration of national emergency y q stopped; .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly,upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed,including reasonable overhead and profit,costs incurred by reason of such termination,and damages. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § '14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE111 §14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of a public authority;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any,seven days' written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting-of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.if such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the initial Decision Maker,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by US,Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 36 reproduetlon or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and wilt he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12.10412014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which 111 expires on 06118/2015,and is not for resale. (1281774422) User Notes: I 1 § 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit,No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; ' .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 CLAIMS § 15.1.1 DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,payment of money,or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term "Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. § 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS 1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later. § 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim,except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4, § 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME § 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on 111 progress of the Work. in the case of a continuing delay,only one Claim is necessary. Inst. AIA Document A201 —2007.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ate Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties_Unauthorized 37 reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06118/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) 1 I § 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be I documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use, income,profit, financing, business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 INITIAL DECISION 1 § 15.2.1 Claims,excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9,and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision.The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1,an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due,unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree,the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise, or(5)advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that,in the Initial Decision Maker's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims,the Initial Decision Maker may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision.The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either(1)provide a I re •. •• • _ 1 _. ?• ••• '• :.data,(2)advise_tire.Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or(3)advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any,the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim,or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim.This initial decision shall(1)he in writing;(2)state the reasons therefor;and(3)notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker,of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and,if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation,to binding dispute resolution. I § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time,subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. 1 trait. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright(i 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING This Ale Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 38 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to f the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by MA software at 13;13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06718/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I I 111 § 15.2.6.1 Either partymay,within 30 days from the date of an initial decision,demand in writing that the other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required,then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue I binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if I any,of the nature and amount of the Claim. if the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Owner may, but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in Iaccordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 MEDIATION I § 15.3.1 Claims,disputes,or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4,9.10.5,and 15.1_6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution, I § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing,delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. I The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but,in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings,which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2,the parties may nonetheless proceed Ito the selection of the arbitrator(s)and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. § 15,3.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall he held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in Imediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4 ARBITRATION I § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement,any Claim subject to, but not resolved by,mediation shall be subject to arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement.A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, I delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration.The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. , I § 15.4,1.1 A demand for arbitration shall he made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation,but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes,receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of Ilegal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. I § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court I having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER § 15.4,4.1 Either party,at its sole discretion,may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that(I)the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration AIA Document A201""—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ate Document is protected by U.S,Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 39 I reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe,civil and criminal penalties,and wilt he prosecuted to f the maximum extent possible under the taw.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I permits consolidation, (2)the arbitrations to be consolidated substantiallyinvolve common questions of law or fact, 1 and(3)the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Either party,at its sole discretion,may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a I common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim,dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grantto any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation,the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. I I I 1 I I I I I I AIA Document A201'—2007,Copyright CI 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963 1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved,WARNING.This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 40 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 13:13:02 on 12104!2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1281774422) I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 SUPPLEMENTARY LEMINTARY CONDITIONS TO A1A DOCUMENT A201, 2007 EDITION, "GENERAL CONDi"T'IONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION" I SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following conditions modify, change, delete from or add to the preceeding"General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AlA Document A201, 2007 Edition. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. 1 ARTICLE 2; OWNER 1 2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner Delete subparagraph 2.2.2 and substitute the following.; 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures, or for permanent changes in existing facilities. The Owner shall secure and pay for the following; I. Plan Check fees and Building Permit fees. 2. Electrical connection fee. 3. Water hook-up fee. 4. Sanitary sewer hook-up fee. 5. Storm sewer connection fee. 6. Impact fees. Delete su2 aragrjph 2.2.5 and substitute the following_ 2.2.5 Reference the Invitation to Bidders or Invitation for Negotiated Bid, Specification Sections 001000 for information concerning Construction Documents issued to the Contractor. ARTICLE 3;CONTRACTOR 3.4 Labor and Materials Add_the following Subparagraphs 3.4.2.1 and 3A.2.2 to 3_4;_ 3.4.2.1 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements of the Specifications(Division l). .1 Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract time requirements. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC - 1 111 WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 i determined to be ,2 Required product is not acceptable to governing authority,authority, ornon-compatible, or cannot be properly coordinated, warranted or insured, or has other recognized disability as certified by Contractor. I .3 Substantial advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages including delays, additional compensation to Architect/Engineer for redesign, investigation, evaluation and other necessary services,and similar consideration. 3.4.2.2 By making requests for substitutions based on Clause 3.4.2.1.3 above,the Contractor: .1 represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; .2 represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would for that I specified; .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under separate I contracts, but excludes that Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent;and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 3.7 Permits, Fees,Notices,and Compliance with Laws I Delete subparag?.ah 3_,7,1 and substitutc_thc.follow in11. 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,and not specifically identified as the Owner's responsibility by subparagraph 2.2.2; the Contractor shall secure and pay for all other permits and governmental fees,-licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. Add to 3_7.4.th.e following_ 3.7.4.1 No adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be permitted, however, in connection with a-conceal-ed-or-unknown condition which does not differ materially from those conditions disclosed or which reasonably s toe c have beendisclosed y •to ontractor's (1) pi ioi inspections, tests, reviews-and- preconstruction services for the Project, or(2) inspection,tests, reviews, and preconstruction services which the Contractor had the opportunity to make or should have performed in connection with the Project. ARTICLE 7; CHANGES iN THE WORK I 7.2 Change Orders I Add to 7.2 the following; 7.2.2 Agreement on any Change Order shall constitute a final settlement of all matters relating to the I change in the Work which is the subject of the Change Order, including but not limited to, all direct and indirect costs associated with such change and any and all adjustments to the Contract Sum and the construction schedule. In the event a Change Order increases the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC-2 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 Iinclude the Work covered by such Change Order in Application for Payment. as a separate Application Y p 1L line Iteitt entry on the Schedule of Values for the Project. 1 7.3 Construction Change Directives IAdd to subparagraph 7.3_5 the following. In the second fine after the word "Architect" insert the following words: "in writing within forty-eight hours".... The balance of the subparagraph remains unchanged. I pelete su(zparagraph 7.3.7 and substitute the followirt>: I 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in I case of an increase in the Contract Sum an allowance for overhead, and profit; including General Conditions and all other indirect costs including general office and temporary facilities as set forth in subparagraph 7.3.11 below. In all such instances in which the cost of Work is relevant, the Contractor shall I keep and present full and complete records of all costs incurred, or costs avoided, and shall present to the Owner an itemized accounting thereof in the form as instructed, by the Architect. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of the Subparagraph 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following: I .1 actual labor hours worked by Contractor and any subcontractors, charged to the Project at the actual hourly rate paid the employee performing the Work, plus the actual costs for fringe benefits, I payroll taxes and insurance; the Contractor and such subcontractor's billing rates for labor rates, payroll taxes, payroll insurance and fringe benefits will be submitted and approved by the Owner prior to subcontractor's commencement of Work; 1 .2 costs of materials, or equipment incorporated into the work including sales tax and cost of delivery;at the actual cost thereof as documented by actual material supplier invoice slips; 1 .3 actual rental and operation costs for equipment, and actual equipment operation hours. The hourly rate will be based upon the actual rental rate charged the Contractor or subcontractor by an unrelated third party; or if the equipment is Contractor or subcontractor owned, then one-half the I Blue Book hourly rental rate effective as of January 1, 2007, plus full value Blue Book estimated operating costs per hour. Small tools and consumables are defined as an item of equipment or tool which initial cost is five hundred dollars ($500.00) or less and is paid as part of subparagraph I 7.3.11; and if any equipment is not listed in the Blue Book, then such rental rate shall be agreed upon by the parties; IAdd the followin sAp ragir 1phs,7.3.1 ],_7.3.12,.7_3,13 and 7.3.;1,4 to.paragmh 7.3: 7.3.1 1 In subparagraph 7.3.7 the allowance foroverhead and profit combined includes supervision, superintendence, taxes, insurance, bonds, small tools, permit fees, incidentals, general office expense, field Ioffice/temporary facilities expenses and all other expenses not included above, then no amounts other than costs as defined by subparagraphs 7.3.7.1, 7.3.7.2 and 7.3.7.3 and overhead and profit as defined herein shall be included in the total cost to the Owner. The allowance for overhead and profit shall be based on the Ifollowing schedule: .1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own work force, 10 percent of I the cost for any single item costing up to $10,000. For any single item costing more than $10,000, 10 percent on the first$10,000 and 5 percent of the amount over$10,000. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC -3 I WiNCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 I .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor for any single item costing up to $10,000. For any single item costing more than $10,000, 10 percent on the first $10,000 and 5 percent of the amount over $10,000. .3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by the Subcontractor's or Sub-subcontractor's own forces, 10 percent of the amount due for single item costing up to $10,000. For any single item costing more than $10,000, 10% on the first $10,000 and 5%of the amount over$10,000. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub-contractor, 5 percent of the amount due the subcontractor. .5 There will not be allowed more than three percentages, not to exceed the maximum percentages shown above, regardless of the number of tiered subcontractors. .6 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.7. .7 in order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major costs items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. 7.3.12 The Contractor's request for Change Order with appropriate supporting data as described in I Subparagraph 7.3.7 and with applicable Proposal Request for and/or A.I.A. Document 6714 attached shall be expeditiously priced, assembled and sent by the Contractor to the Architect. One complete copy of the Contractor's Change Order request with all supporting data shall be sent at the same time to the Owner's Representative. 7.3.13 Each request for a Change Order for extra compensation under this paragraph shall be completed I and delivered to the Owner and Architect within thirty (30) calendar days after such change or additional work is identified. To the extent the cost of impacts, delay or hindrance to unchanged work are known at the time of performing the Work, such Change Order shall fully compensate the Contractor. Any request or claiimSor-impact costs, delay_or hindrance must be made within five (5) calendar days of the event from which the claim arises and will be processed in accoittarrcowith Article 15.1. 7.3.14 The Contractor shall include equivalent provisions to subparagraph 7.3.7 in each subcontract and purchase order the Contractor may issue with respect to the Work,and in such instance the cost of the Work to the extent such changed or additional Work has been subcontracted or is being furnished or performed by supplier of materials shall include such monies as may be due the subcontractor or supplier based upon cost of the Work to such subcontractor or supplier, determined in accordance with the provisions of the Article. ARTICLE 8;TIME 8.1 Definitions I Af:er_Paragraph 8.1.1 Add, following_paramph W INCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC -4 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 8.1.1.1 The Contractor shall substantially complc,tc, the work as defined by paragraph 9.8.1 within 21 consecutive calendar days after the Notice to Proceed as defined by Paragraph 8.1.2. In subparagraph 8.1.2, in the first sentence, delete the word "Agreement" and substitute the words "Notice to Proceed". 1 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time Delete subparagraph 8.3.3 and substitute the following, 8.3.3 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract Documents, an extension in the Contract Time, to the extent permitted under Paragraph 8.3.1, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any of the following: .1 delay in commencement, prosecution completion of the Work; .2 hindrance or obstruction in the performance of the Work; .3 loss of productivity; or .4 other similar claims(collectively referred to in this subparagraph 8.3.3 as Delays). This will be the remedy whether or not such Delays are foreseeable, unless a Delay is caused by acts of the Owner constituting active interference with the Contractor's performance of the Work, and only to the extent such acts continue after the Contractor furnishes the Owner with written notice of such interference. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any damages, in connection with any Delay, including, without limitation, consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages or other similar remuneration. The Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents including, without limitation, ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling or correction of the Work, and regardless of the extent or frequency of the Owner' exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference with the Contractor's performance of the Work. Further notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Contractor recognize that in the event the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Project by the Projected Completion Date(plus any proper extension granted pursuant to a Change Order issued under paragraph 8.3.1.), the Owner will incur substantial damages and the extent of such damages shall be incapable of accurate measurement. Nonetheless, the Owner and the Contractor acknowledge that on the date of this Contract, the amount of this Contract, the amount of liquidated damages set forth below represents a good faith estimate as to the actual potential damages that the Owner will incur as a result of late Substantial Completion of the Project. Such liquidated damages shall be the sole and exclusive remedy of the Owner for late completion of the Project, and the Owner hereby expressly waives all other remedies available at law or in equity with respect to losses resulting from late completion. The amount of the liquidated damages calculated hereunder does not include any penalty. This liquidated damages Clause covers delay damages only and the Owner reserves the right to recover from the Contractor all other damages the Owner may incur as a result of any breach of this Contract, including but not limited to direct damages, consequential damages, attorneys' fees and costs. The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Contractor shall pay the Owner,as liquidated damages for delay,the following amount for each day that expires after the Projected Completion Date (plus any proper extension granted pursuant to a Change Order issued under paragraph 8.3.1) until such time as all requirements for Substantial Completion have been satisfied by the Contractor: $5,000 per day. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC - 5 WINCO FOODS, [IC 11/13 Add the following subparagra qhs 8.3.4 to p at:agr•aph.,K.3.. 8.3.4 If the Contractor submits a progress report indicating,or otherwise expressing an intention to achieve completion of the Work prior to any completion date required by the Contract Documents or expiration of the Contract Time, no liability of the Owner to the Contractor for any failure of the Contractor to so complete the Work shall be created or implied. ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3 Applications for Payment Pp Y 9.3.1 Add the fgllowirag Sentence_ The form of Application for Payment shall be AIA Document 0702, 1992 Edition, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA Document 0703, 1992 Edition, Continuation sheet. Include State Sales Tax on all application for payments continuation sheets. 9.3.1.3 Until substantial completion, the Owner will pay ninety percent (90%) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. 9.6 Progress Payments 9.6.I.1 Progress Payments shall fall due on or about the 10`i' day of each month (10 days after receipt of the Application for Payment by the Architect. 9.8 Substantial Completion Add the following Sentence to.the end of the Paraoi•aph 9.8.5:19 The payment shall be sufficient to increase the total payment to ninety-five percent(95%) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims. 1 ARTICLE 10; PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.3 Hazardous Materials Add to 10.3.1 the fbllowing:. 10.3.1.1 Reference to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) in this Article does not negate the appropriate abatement of asbestos and PCB-containing materials as specifically required by the Contract Documents. I ARTICLE 11; INSURANCE AND BONDS I Add the followitng Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2 I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC-6 I WINCO FOODS, LI.,C 11/13 I11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits: I1. Workers' Compensation: I (a) State: Statutory (b) Applicable Federal: Statutory (c) Employer's Liability: $100,000 per Accident I 2. Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Independent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; I-3road Form Property Damage: I (a) Combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage: I $2,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate I (b) Property Damage Liability Insurance will provide X,C or U coverage as applicable. 3. Contractual Liability: I. (a) Bodily Injury: I $2,000,000 Each Occurrence (b) Property Damage: I $2,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate I 4. Personal Injury,with Employment Exclusion deleted: I $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate 5. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: I (a) Combined Single Limits for bodily injury and property damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence I $1,000,000 Annual Aggregate IAdd the following;Clause 11.1.3.1 to 11.1.3: 11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of Certification of Insurance herein required for each I copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Subparagraphs 1E1.1, 11.1.2 and 11.1.3. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC - 7 ' 1 /13 I WiNCO FOODS, LLC 1 Addtl e followittg I 11.1.5 The following shall be named as additional insured on all insurance policies and so indicated on Certificates: (a) WinCo Foods, L.L.C. (b) Bruce W. Petersen,NCARB 11.3 Property Insurance (Builders Risk) Delete subparatmh 11.3.1.,..11.3.1.1, 11.3.1.2, and L,3 L in.its entirety and substitute the following_ 11.3.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. Such insurance shall be a company or companies against which the Owner has no reasonable objection. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work and shall include"All Risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. If not covered under All Risk insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the Work stored off the site or in transit when such portions of the Work are to be included in an Application for Payment under Subparagraph 9.3.2. Name as additional insured those parties listed in paragraph 11.1.5. 1 Add the following Clause I.1 3i,_.l to 11,3.1:, 11.3.1.1 The form of policy for this coverage shall be"Completed Value". 1 Add the following Clause 11.3.1.2 to 11,3:1:, required,1.3.1.2 If by the terms of this insurance any mandatory deductibles are reI , or if the Contractor /. should elect, with the concurrent of the Owner, to increase the mandatory deductible amounts, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of the amount of the deductible in the event of a paid claim. Maximum deductible shall be$2,500.00 per occurrence. Add the following Clause_11,3.1.3,to.1 1.3 1_ ,..rine 1 1.3.1.3 The Contractor shall file two certified copies of all policies ..• a :• • _- loss can occur. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance and to so notify the Owner,then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11,3:4 _ Delete this subparagraph in its entirety., Add to Article 11 the following; 11.5 Indemnity II 11.5.1 The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and save harmless the Owner, the Architect, and the Architect's Consultants from and against all claims, damages, costs, legal fees, expenses, actions and suits whatsoever including injury or death of others or any employee of the Contractor, subcontractors, or the sub-subcontractors, agents or employees, caused by failure to comply fully with any term or condition of the contract,or caused by damage to or loss of use of property, directly or indirectly, by the carrying out of the work, or caused by any matter or thing done, permitted or omitted to be done by the Contractor, his WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUPPLEMENTARY NTARY CONDITIONS SC - 8 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 agents, subcontractors or employees and occasioned by the negligence of the Contractor, his agents, subcontractors or employees. I ARTICLE 15; CLAIMS AND DISPUTES I 15.1 Claims IDelete subparagraph 15.1.2 and substitute the following; 15.1.2 Notice of Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving I rise to such Claims or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Provided, however, that the claimant shall use his best efforts to furnish the Architect and the other party, as expeditiously as possible, with notice of any Claim including, without limitation, those in connection with concealed or unknown conditions, once such claim is identified, and I shall cooperate with the Architect and the other party against whom the Claim is made in any effort to mitigate the alleged or potential damages, delay or other adverse consequences arising out of the condition I which is the cause of such a Claim. Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. • IAO to._.l 5.1.4 the following: 15.1.4.1 The parties agree that an integral part of this agreement is the ability to resolve claims and disputes I in a timely manner. To achieve this timely resolution, the parties agree to establish a set cost allowance for delays and time extensions. There will be no additional allowance for equitable adjustment for any general conditions. Costs of mobilization, demobilization, layout, temporary facilities, equipment, home office, or 1 field overhead costs(extended overhead)or other costs of supervision herein relating to change orders,time extensions, or delays, other than as set for the in this paragraph. The Owner will pay only for the following verifiable costs associated with the time extension or delay; 1) the actual labor costs, fringe benefits, employment taxes and insurance related to the Project Superintendent; 2) the cost associated with the fair Irental value of the Project Superintendent's vehicle directly related to the time extension; 3)the direct costs attributable to the extension for the field office facility including telephone line, utilities, power, lights, water,and sewer(toilets). Mark-up on these costs will not be allowed. IAdd to_15.1.5.I the following: IAll claims for costs related to claims for additional time shall be pursuant to paragraph. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS I 1 I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) . I SUPPLEMENTARY N"TRY CONDITIONS SC-9 etiVra s- r iS• Document A7OITM - 1997 instructions to Bidders 111 for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has THE OWNER: added information needed for its completion.The author may also (Name, legal status and address) have revised the text of the original AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to • THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates I where the author has added necessary information and where TABLE OF ARTICLES the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. 1 DEFINITIONS This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR I AIA Document A701".—1997,Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties<Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or .1 any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AlA software at 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (11481551831 I I ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents.The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or invitation to Bid,Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary instructions to Bidders,the bid form,and other sample bidding and contract forms.The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings,Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. § 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,AiA Document A2©l,or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. § 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions,clarifications or corrections. § 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein,submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. § 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base,to which Work may be added or firorn which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. § 1.6 An Alternate Bid(or Alternate)is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work,as described in the Bidding Documents,is accepted. § 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials,equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. § 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. § 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials,equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: § 2.1.1 'The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents,to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted,and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. § 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. § 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be perfurmcd and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements-lftlreproposed Contract Documents. § 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials,equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 COPIES § 3.1,1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any,stated therein.The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. 1 AIA Document A701''—1997.Copyright a 1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.VilARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA' Document,or 2 any portion of it,may result In severe Civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1148155183) I I 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directlyto Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the § _ t Y Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,or in supplementary instructions to bidders. I § 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility f'or errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. I § 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work.No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. I § 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other,and with other work being hid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is I submitted,shall examine the site and local conditions,and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. I § 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.2.3 Interpretations,corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will he made by Addendum. Interpretations,corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them, § 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS I § 3.3.1 The materials,products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function,dimension,appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. § 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings,performance and test data,and other information necessary for an evaluation.A statement setting forth changes in other materials,equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require,shall be included.The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer.The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. I § 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids,such approval will he set forth in an Addendum.Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. I § 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. § 3.4 ADDENDA I § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. § 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that Ipurpose. § 3.4.3 Addenda will he issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum I withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued,and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. I AIA Document A701""—1997.Copyright int 1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.AU rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document Is protected by U,S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or 3 I any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06118/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1148155183) I I ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. § 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. § 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. h1 case of discrepancy,the amount written in words shall govern. § 4.1.41ntcrlineations,alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. § 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required,enter"No Change." § 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested,the Bidder may,without forfeiture of the bid security,state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder.The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. § 4.1,7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder.The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract.A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed.A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. § 4.2 BID SECURITY § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders.The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required,the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages,not as a penalty.The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2. § 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required,it shall he written on AIA Document A310,Bid Bond,unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents,and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. § 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either(a)the Contract has been executed and bonds,if required,have been furnished,or(b)the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or(c)all Bids have been rejected. § 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS § 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid,the bid security,if'any,and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope.lite envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and_ shall be identified with the Project name,the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable,the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail,the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED"on the face thereof. § 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received idler the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. § 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. § 4.3.4 Oral,telephonic,telegraphic,facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. I § 4,4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID § 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids,and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. AIA Document A7OITM—1997.Copyright 1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA` Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or 4 any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 05/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1148155183) i I I § 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids,a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the I signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received,and date-and time-stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids.A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. I § 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. I § 4.4.4 Bid security, ifrequircd,shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS I § 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner,if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. I § 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids.A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents,or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to Irejection. § 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been I submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which,in the Owner's judgment,is in the Owner's own best interests. I § 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination,unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents,and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. I ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request,a properly I executed AIA Document A305,Contractor's Qualification Statement,unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. § 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY I The Owner shall,at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids,tiu•nish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished,the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. I § 6.3 SUBMITTALS § 6.3.1 The Bidder shall,as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents,after notification of selection for the award of a Contract,furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: I .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers,products,and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work;and I .3 names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for the principal portions of the Work. § 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and I responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. AIA Document A701 ro'—1997.Copyright 01970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNINO:This AIAe Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAe Document,or 5 any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extant possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software al 11:51:00 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/16/2015,and is not for resale. I User Notes: (1148155183) I 1 1 § 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract,the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. if the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity,the Bidder may,at the Bidder's option, (I)withdraw the Bid or(2)submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution.The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder.in the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. § 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder.Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. § 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the cost shall be included in the Bid. if the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract,the cost of such bonds shall he added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. § 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources,changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. § 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract.If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent,the Bidder shall,prior to commencement of the Work,submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. § 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided,the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. § 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. § 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents,the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA octtnsaft—Atilt.Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. 1 1 1 AIA Document A701 -1997.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA°' Document,or 6 arty portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible ander the law.This document was produced by AIA software al 11:51:00 on 12/04(2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015.and is not for resale. User Notes: (1148155183) 1 Document G7O9TM - 2001 Work Changes Proposal Request PROJECT(Name and address): PROPOSAL REQUEST NUMBER: OWNER:El DATE OF ISSUANCE: ARCHITECT: El CONSULTANT:El OWNER(Name and address): CONTRACT FOR:General Construction CONTRACTOR:CI CONTRACT DATE: FIELD:LI FROM ARCHITECT(Name and ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: 1204 OTHER:[1] • address): TO CONTRACTOR(Name and address): Please submit an itemized proposal for changes in the Contract Sum and Contract Time for proposed modifications to the Contract Documents described herein.Within Zero(0)days,the Contractor must submit this proposal or notify the Architect, in writing,of the date on which proposal submission is anticipated. THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER,A CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE OR A DIRECTION TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS. DESCRIPTION(Insert a written description of the Work): ATTACHMENTS(List attached documents that support description): REQUESTED BY THE ARCHITECT: (Signature) (Printed name and title) AIA Document G709T"—2001.Copyright©1993 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved,WARNING:This Ale Dooiment is protected by U,S,Copyright Law and InternationaS Treaties,linauthoeized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any porton of it,may resutt in severe civil A n d criminal penalties,and will he rrasecuted to the maximum extent possible under Site law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:18:30 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1433293112) I ......., WO A @ -kle,,, ---, $-. :4-4-- Document G710" — 1992 Architect's Supplemental Instructions I PROJECT(Name and address): ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL OWNER:0 INSTRUCTION NO: ARCHITECT:E] CONSULTANT:D I OWNER(Name and addres.$): DATE OF ISSUANCE: CONTRACTOR:0 CONTRACT FOR:General Construction FIELD:D I FROM ARCHITECT(Name and address): CONTRACT DATE: OTHER:0 ITO CONTRACTOR(Name and ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: address): 1204 I The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with I the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgment that there will he no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. IDESCRIPTION: I ATTACHMENTS: (Here insert listing of documents that support description.) IISSUED BY THE ARCHITECT: I (Signature) (Printed name and(itle) I I I I AIA Document G710'm—1992.Copyright(0)1979 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING This Ale Document is prntected b'. U.S.Copyright Law and International Troaties,Unauthori7ed reproduction or distribution,,-tf ths.Alit''Document,or any portion of it,may 1 I . . will result in severe civil and crirnina penaltie.,and be prosecuted to the ma ximere extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:19:25 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060_1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1818714929) I MIN OM OM IIIIII IIIIII 11111 elle Mil IIIIII MO Mill IIIIII IIIIII Mil IIIIII IIIIII Ell Mill IIIIII IIAJA Document G712TM - 1972 Shop Drawing and Sample Record PROJECT: ARCHITECT PROJECT NO.: CONTRACTOR: REFERRED ACTION ; SPEC COPIES TO SECTION 4 I r. DATE p CONTRACTOR = cr.: p TITLE SUBCONTRACTOR vx DATE "' DATiRECD. SHOP Di(. TO DAESENT > = ✓; < RET'D, <} Z TRADE RiiD. >OR SAMPLE I � —z s ,z.< L 2 — v J — i i 3 I , 3 ' I I 1 7 31 1 2 3 z 3 t I 3 I I j I l } AIA Document G712T'"—1972.Copyright©1972 by The American Institute of Architects.AU rights reserved. EARNING:This ALA' pubreneist is ;oiebtect by U, C J: ,tt'gn ..eed reprn,j;Sction Or dicUr bot3eir:of this MA 1'.a rf nam or e�., n ont . >- .d. p �E�f Lew'=rad lrl r tar,, � t, "=gies n sit o. 950279 0 misfire.h si a 11 s a;n. ,and is not for ret ..aca�T fir_ .'. a _s<_ut xtcr t t ,s REt4 ,i,;r!er the °:•,This document was produced by AlA software at 13:2030 on 12!0412014 under Order No.995t7279060_i which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. 1 User Notes: (1162235444) I 1 1' AiAi Document G714"M — 2007 Construction Change Directive I PROJECT:(Name and address) DIRECTIVE NUMBER: DATE: OWNER:❑ ARCHITECT:❑ CONTRACT FOR:General Construction TO CONTRACTOR:(Name.and address) CONTRACT DATED: CONSULTANT:❑ I ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: 1204 CONTRACTOR:❑ FIELD:❑ I OTHER:❑ You are hereby directed to make the following change(s)in this Contract: I (Describe briefly any proposed changes or list any attached information in the alternative) I PROPOSED ADJUSTMENTS 1. The proposed basis of adjustment to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price is: El •Lump Sum decrease of$0.00 •Unit Price of$ per ❑ •As provided in Section 7.3.3 of AIA Document A201-2007 In •As follows: 2. The Contract Time is proposed to(remain unchanged).The proposed adjustment,if any, is 0 days. I When signed by the Owner and Architect and received by the Contractor,this document Contractor signal=indicates agreement becomes effective IMMEDIATELY as a Construction Change Directive(CCD),and the with the proposed adjustments in Contract Contractor shall proceed with the change(s)described above. Sum and Contract Time set forth in this CCD. I ARCHITECT(Firm name) OWNER(Hrm name) CONTRACTOR(Firm name) I ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS BY(Signature) BY(Signature) BY(Signature) I (Typed name) (Typed name) (TYped name) DATE DATE DATE I I AIA Document G714T"-2007.Copyright®2001 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING.This Ale'Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document.,or any portion of it may 1 I msult ire auvere civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software et 13:21:45 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.0950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1815702337) I I Iviiio LI-41:-'' ''') Document G704TM - 2000 1 Certificate of Substantial Completion I PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: ! OWNER:❑ (Name and address) CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACT DATE: ARCHITECT:❑ ITO OWNER: TO CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR:0 (Name and addr esa) (Name and address) FIELD:0 OTHER:❑ IPROJECT OR PORTION OF THE PROJECT DESIGNATED FOR PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE SHALL INCLUDE: IThe Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and found,to the Architect's best knowledge,information and belief, to he substantially complete,Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its I intended use.The date of Substantial Completion attic Project or portion designated above is the date of issuance established by this Certificate, which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents,except as stated below: 1 Warranty Date of Commencement I ARCHITECT BY DATE OF ISSUANCE A list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto.The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.Unless otherwise agreed to in I writing,the date of commencement of warranties for items on the attached list will be the date of issuance of the final Certificate of Payment or the date of final payment. Cost estimate of Work that is incomplete or defective:$0.00 I The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within Zero(0)days from the above date of Substantial Completion. 1 CONTRACTOR BY _ _,___ DATE The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion as substantially complete and will assume full possession at (time)on 1 (date). OWNER BY DATE I The responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor air security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance shall be as follows: (Note:Owner's and Contractors legal and insw'cmnce counsel should determine and review insurance requirements and coverage.) •• •I AIA Document G704'—2000.Copyright W 1963,1978,1992 and 2000 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:Tt S AIA" Cmocurmcnt is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized ru production or distribution of this AIA`Document.oc any I portion of it,may result I'm severe civil and criminal ponaltias,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 13:22:58 on 12/04/2014 under Order No.9950279060 1 which expires on 06/18/2015,and is not for resale. User Notes: (1416382017) • I • WINCO FOODS, EEC 04/14 SECTION 003000 -BID FORM WINCO STORE NO. 23 ' (Sushi Kiosk) 7501 Dartmouth Street • Tigard,Oregon ' In response to and in compliance with the invitation to bidders for the above referenced store, the undersigned bidder having examined the Contract documents and all related information along with any local conditions that affect the project construction, performance and costs and fully inspected the site for all particulars, hereby proposes to execute the work in the time period stated and agrees to furnish all Labor, Materials, Services & Equipment to complete the work in compliance with the contract documents for the following amount of money: Base Bid: The proposed bidder agrees to furnish all Labor, Materials, Services and Equipment necessary to complete the work shown on the drawings and specifications for the sum of: 111 CONTRACTOR NOTE: All work inside Building/Site Limit Line. Building Dollars $ Total Base Bid Dollars$ CONTRACTOR NOTE: Fill in State Sales Tax if applicable. Do not include in the base bid. State Sales Tax(Not included in Base Bid) ------ — —_ — — Dollars ' Alternates: See Section 12300 for definitions and schedule of alternates. Alternate No. 1: Bond Alternate: Deduct amount if WinCo Foods, EEC chooses to waive the Payment Bond and the Performance Bond. Deduct( Dollars)($ ) rSeparate Prices: Separate Prices listed below are included in the I-3ase Bid and are listed for the owner's administrative purposes only. See Section 012400 for definitions and Schedule of Separate Prices. ' Separate Price No. 1 (4): Installation Only of Refrigeration Equipment. Dollars $ Separate Price No.2(5): Installation Only of Refrigerated Cases. _...._- --- - -- -- --- — --- -- Dollars $ WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1311) FORM 003000- 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: 1 1'he undersigned bidder agrees to hold this bid open and shall not be with drawn for a period of thirty (30) days form the bid opening date. The undersigned bidder agrees and understands that WinCo Foods, LLC has the right to reject this bid and/or waive any and all irregularities in the bidding process. The undersigned bidder agrees to complete the work within 21 consecutive calendar days. Upon written notice of the acceptance of this bid, the undersigned bidder shall execute and deliver the attached contract for construction ( ) along with the Labor and Material I3ond and Performance Bond and proof of insurance coverage all within ten (10) clays of the date of receipt of the acceptance. 1 ADDENDA: Acknowledge receipt of Addenda by listing the Number and Date of the Addendum. BIDDER IDENTIFICATION: NAME OF BIDDER: ADDRESS: AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: NAME AND TITLE: DATE: SEAL IF CORPORATION: I ENI!)OF SECTION 003000 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) BID FORM 003000-2 t WINCO FOODS, LLC 10/13 SECTION 011000- SUMMARY 1 PART 1-GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary IConditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. I1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. I 4. 5. Work under other contracts. Products ordered in advance. 6. Owner-furnished products. I 7. Identify Disposed Equipment. 8. Use of premises. 9. Owner's occupancy requirements. 10. Work restrictions. I11. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: I1. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for the Work. I 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: WinCo Store No. 23 (Sushi Kiosk)Tigard,Oregon. IB. Owner: WinCo Foods, LLC, 650 N. Armstrong Place, Boise, Idaho 83704 Il. Owner's Representative: The owner's Vice President Construction or Construction Manager shall be the owner's primary contact during construction. The Construction Manager will be identified at the preconstruction conference. I C. Architect: BRUCE W. PE T'RSEN, NCARB, 5200 W. State Street, Boise, Idaho 83703; Chad Pollock, NCARB, Project Architect. The Architect will be the primary contact for interpretation of the contract documents. ID. The Work consists of the following: IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUMMARY 011000 - 1 I 10/13 WINCO FOODS, LLC 1. The Work includes a removing existing pallets and bins and installing a new Sushi Kiosk in an existing Grocery Store. New cases, equipment, framing, finishes, etc. All Architectural, Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing, Refrigeration; work as described here or as shown on or in the contract documents to be completed. 1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT I A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. I 1.5 WORK PHASES A. The Work shall be conducted in phases as described on the drawings I 1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS I A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the I Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Concurrent Work: The Owner shall award separate contracts for the following Construction I Operations at the Project Site, as described in the following Paragraphs 1 and 2. These operations shall be conducted simultaneously with the work under this contract and coordinated and supervised by the Contractor. Please note, the Work described in the following Paragraph No.2 is by the Owner Hired Supplier Subcontractors (O.H.S.S.) and is for "SUPPLY ONLY" of the equipment and/or building components and the Contractor shall be responsible for not only the coordination and I supervision,but also the installation of the six(6)(O.H.S.S.) listed below in Paragraph No.2. 1. lnterio•/Exterior signage other than that identified on Sheet A13. 2. The following list indicates the six (6) Owner Hired Subcontractors (O.H.S.S,) that shall provide for the "SUPPLY ONLY" of the equipment and/or building components listed. The installation for all six(6) of the(O.H.S.S.) shall be by the Contractor as provided for under this contract. The Contractor shall get approval from the Owner VP Construction I for_theinstallation contractors-for No.3 BMS Main Lquipment-aud No___4-Refrigeration Equipment prior to the bid opening date. See the I3id Form, Section 003000 and eparate Prices, Section 012400, for the Contractor's installation price breakdown. 111 1. Structural Steel Joists and Deck 2. HVAC Equipment, Rooftop Package Units and Air Handler Units 3. BMS Main Equipment 4. Refrigeration Equipment 5. Refrigerated Cases I 6. Walk-In Refrigerated Boxes I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I SUMMARY 011000- 2 I 1 WINCO FOODS, EEC 10/13 I1.7 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCI I A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these Purchase Orders to Contractor. Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are included Iin the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase Orders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase-Order I agreements. 2. See Sheets FPI, FP2 and FP3 for list of owner-furnished items. I1.8 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive I Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. 1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to I Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. I 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall he present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for I replacement. S. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. 6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished Iproducts. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. 8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at Project site. I 9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. Il 1. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work. B. Owner-Furnished Products: II. See Drawing for identification of Owner-furnished items. I1.9 DISPOSED EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall coordinate with WinCo's Construction Manager to identify all equipment to be disposed. The Contractor and the Construction Manager shall identify all equipment to be disposed of or transferred from the store. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUMMARY 011000-3 I WINCO FOODS, EEC 10/13 13. All equipment disposed of or transferred from the store shall be listed on the attached Disposed Equipment, Log Form 011001A, contained at the end of this section, Unless specifically identified by WinCo to remain in its possession and/or be sent to another store location, all other equipment shall be the responsibility and ownership of the Contractor. 1.10 USE OF PREMISES i A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises fir construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas and entrances serving premises 111 clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.11 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS i A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having .jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. i WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) i SUMMARY 011000-4 i WINCO FOODS, LLC 10/13 • 1.12 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify any adjacent owner not less than 14 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions, and notify WinCo Construction Manager with proposed schedule. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without adjacent owner and WinCo Construction Manager's written permission. 13. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet(8 ill) of entrances,operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. 1.13 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the ' 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 13. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. ' 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when SO noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is l.ised within a sentence or phrase. i 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUMMARY 011000- 5 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 10/13 ' 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) I PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) I ENI)OF SEC'T'ION 011000 ' 1 I I I t M I I I I i I M WINCO STORE NC). 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUMMARY 011000-6 I 11111111=111111zalifile11111apininNE .11111 111111 111111 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 WinCo F 0 0 D S _471 Eu '&' °lined C4nupairl Disposed Equipment Log WinCo Store No: Date: Store Address: Contractor: Phone: E-mail: Asset Transfer Department Item Description Model Serial No. Manufacturer Date Removed Yes No Store No. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) DISPOSED EQUIPMENT LOG FORM 011000A-1 DISPOSED EQUIPMENT LOG (CONTINUED) WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 Asset Transfer Department Item Description Model Serial No. Manufacturer Date Removed Yes No Store No. Comments: WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) DISPOSED EQUIPMENT LOG FORM 011000A-2 1111111 I S E - - i i W ON N i - O S MI N 101111 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 I SECTION 012300-ALTERNATES I PAR'F 1 -GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1 A• Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project• 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. ' B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a.complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ALTERNATES 012300- 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES I A. Alternate No. 1: Bond Alternate: Include in the Base Bid a price to provide the Payment Bond and the Performance Bond as described in AIA Document A701, Instructions to Bidders, in the Supplementary Instructions, SI-2 and on Section 003000, Bid Form. On the Bid Form, list the amount that WinCo Foods, LLC may deduct from the Base Bid if they choose not to require the bonds listed. I END OF SECTION 012300 1 I I I I 1 I I I I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ALTERNATES 012300-2 I WINCO FOODS, EEC 01/14 SECTION 012400--SEPARATE PRICES rPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section defines the procedural requirements for separate prices. B. A Separate Price is an amount that is included in the Base Bid and is broken out and listed on the bid form for the owner's administrative purposes. Separate prices do not play a part in determining the Apparent Low Bidder. PART PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 --EXECUTION ' 3.1 COORDINATE SEPARATE PRICES WIT!! THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS SPECIFICATION. I3.2 SCHEDULE OF SEPARATE PRICES A. Separate Price No. 1'(4): Refrigeration Equipment Installation a. All Labor, Services, and Equipment and Miscellaneous Materials as required for the installation only of the Refrigeration Equipment as shown on and specified in the Contract Documents. 13. Separate Price No. 2 (5): Refrigerated Case Installation a. All Labor, Services, and Equipment and Miscellaneous Materials as required for the installation only of the Refrigeration Cases as shown on and specified in the Contract Documents. ENI) OF SECTION 012400 i 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SEPARATE PRICES 012400- 1 1 WINCO FOODS, 1.,LC 03/13 I SECTION 012600-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES I PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS IA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing 1 Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 CHANGES MINOR O IN THE WORK lA. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Form 0710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." Form is included in Division 00, Bidding and Contract IRequirements. II A PROPOSAL. REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If I necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them I instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 3 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. Ia. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. if requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. I d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600- 1 I I WINCO FOODS, I..,LC 03/13 's and activityrelationship. Use available total float before requesting I finish times, P an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the I Contract,Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the I Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the I Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Form G709, "Proposal Request", provided by Owner. Form is included in Division 00, Building&Contract Requirements. I 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes,normal product imperfections,and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead-costs and other margins claimed. 13. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I- CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-2 I 1 WINCO FOODS, L.,L.G 03/13 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Form 0701, "Change Order". Form is included Division 00, Bidding and Contract Requirements 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form 0714, "Construction Change Directive". Form is included in Division 00, Bidding & Contract Requirements. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 13. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. I'ART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) I ENI) OF SECTION 012600 I I 1 I I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-3 I I WINCO FOODS, LEC 03/13 1 SECTION 012900- PAYMENT' PROCEDURES I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS IA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract; including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and I process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: I1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances. I 2. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit I prices. 4. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. I 1.3 DEFINI'T'IONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 1 A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. I1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: Ia. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to WinCo Construction Manager at earliest possible date I but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 I I WINCO FOODS, I..,LC 03/13 t Manual table of contents as a guide Format and Content: Use the, Project to establish line items 111 for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: I a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Contractor's name and address. d. Application No. e. Application Date. I 2. Submit draft of MA Form G703, "Continuation Sheets". Form is included in Division 00, Bidding&Contract Requirements. 3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;total shall equal the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. I 5. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense,at Contractor's option. I 8, Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT I A. 'ach Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. I 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 111 B. Payment Application "Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-2 I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 C. Payment.rt Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to WinCo Construction Manager by the 25th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Form 0702 and MA Form 0703 for Applications for Payment:. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. WinCo Construction Manager will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction I 2. Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to WinCo Construction Manager by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. . Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. 0. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. 1 H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment,submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage,on each item, 2. When an application shows completion of an item,submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to iOwner. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-3 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 Substantial Completion: Submit an Application for Payment 111 Application for Payment at p Pl showing 100 percent completion less retainage for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 'I 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting 1 documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 111 2. "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts, Claims and Release of Liens", AIA Form No. 6706 and 0706A. 3. "Consent of Surety to Final Payment" (If required)AIA form No.6707. 4. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Refrigeration Equipment Start-up(Verify with WinCo Construction Manager). PART 2 - PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 I I I I 1 1 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 111 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-4 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 10/13 1 SECTION 013300- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES I PART l -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT'S A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. At the end of this section is the Submittal Log, WinCo Form 013300A for your use. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and 1 the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 0] Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. S. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. 13. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of ' construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 1 I WINCO FOODS, L,L,C. 10/13 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so I processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. I a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. I. initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. I I, indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 inches x 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3, include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. I b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal I and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittiiMaiitect will not accept submittals received from-sources other than Contractor. 1. `Transmittal Form: Provide on form for all the appropriate information submitted and action requested, 2. On the transmittal form or on an attached separate sheet, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals,and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor 111variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. F. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of 11 construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. WINCO STORE ORI,NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I SUBMIT"I'AL. PROCEDURES 013300-2 I 1 WINCO FOODS, I.,LC 10/13 1 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE J A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction schedule. Submit prior to the date established for"Commencement of the Work." I 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the"Schedule of Values." 2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. IAs work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion, 3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. I 4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in I proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work, 5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of I subcontracts, Submittal Log, progress reports, payment requests,and other schedules. C. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. indicate Substantial completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. I IPART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS " I A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. I 1. The Architect will distribute copies to the owner and his consultants. It is the contractors responsibility to distribute to all other parties as required. 1 B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. I. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are 1 not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable, 3. Include the following information, as applicable: Ia. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. , i c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-3 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 10/13 i. Mill reports. 1 I j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 1. Testing by recognized testing agency. in. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit four (4) copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return a minimum of one (1) copies. The contractor shall run copies as required for distribution. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the i following information,as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet-Sipe: Except foutemplates, patterns, and similar-fuH-sire drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by I I inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. 3. Number of Submittals: Submit one (1) reproducible bond copy. The Architect will review, stamp and reproduce and retain copies for their file, and the owner and consultants as required and return the original stamped bond copy to the contractor. The contractor shall reproduce and distribute drawings to subcontractors and suppliers as I required. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together t in one submittal package. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-4 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC I0/13 I2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: I a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample Source. Id. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples returned to the contractor and not designated as Owner's property, are the Iproperty of Contractor. 4. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared I from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or Icontainers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing . and inspection. Ia. Number of Samples: Submit four (4) sets of Samples. Architect will retain two (2) Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned ISample set as a Project Record Sample for closeout. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated, 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least four(4) sets of Ipaired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product. Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written I summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: I. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 1 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit four(4) copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two(2)copies. ■ a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document for close out. I F. Application for Payment:: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." I. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 5 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 1 0/13 1. Refer to the Submittal Log for a list of submittals required to be reviewed and approved I prior to processing the Contractor's first payment application. G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment I Procedures." 2.2 INFORMATIONAL,SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1 1. Number of Copies: Submit two (2)copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience I of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. II D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying thatAnaiiufactu-rer•complios with requirements in the Contract-Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. G. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that III product complies with requirements in the Contract.Documents. H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that I material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's I standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I SUBMITTAL, PROCEDURES 013300 -6 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 10/13 J. Product. Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on I evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. K. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 0I Section "Quality Requirements." I.,. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. M. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. N. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard ,form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 0. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONT'RACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name i and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUBMITTAL, PROCEDURES 013300- 7 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 10/13 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required,and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken,as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where the submittal is marked "Approved," the WorkIII covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the Contract Document. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 2. Final-but-Restricted Release: Where the submittal is marked "Approved as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies both with Architect's/Engineer's notations and corrections on the submittal and the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3. Rejected.: Where the submittal is marked "Not Approved, Resubmit,"do not proceed with the Work covered by the submittal. Prepare a new submittal for a product that complies with the Contract Documents. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. F. Submittal Log, WinCo Form 013300A, is included at the end of this section. 1 3.3 REVERSE SUBMITTAL I A. General: A reverse submittal is one that comes from the manufacturer, supplier or subcontractor directly to the Architect instead of directly to the Contractor. 13 Architect's Submittal Action: The Architect shall review and process-the—submittal(s) as follows. .. 1. After the first review, if there are corrections to be made, the A.O.R. will mark up the submittal(s) appropriately, stamp and return to the manufacturer, supplier or subcontractor for corrections. 2. The manufacturer, supplier or subcontractor will make the required corrections and send the revised submittal back to the Architect for a subsequent review. If there are further corrections to be made,repeat B.1 and 13.2 3. When the submittal is approved for further processing, the Architect will mark-up the submittal appropriately, stamp and forward to the Contractor for their review. C. Contractor's Submittal Action: The Contractor will receive the processed and stamped I submittal from the Architect and process as follows. in WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-8 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 10/13 1. After review, if there are corrections to be made, the Contractor will mark-up the submittal(s)appropriately,stamp and return the submittal to the manufacturer, supplier or I 2.. subcontractor for corrections. The manufacturer, supplier or subcontractor will make the required corrections and send a revised submittal back to the Contractor fbr a subsequent review. If there are further corrections to be made, repeat C.1 and C.2. 3. After Contractor receipt of the submittal from the Architect, if C.I and C.2 action is not required and the submittal is approved for final processing by the Contractor, they will mark-up the submittal accordingly, stamp and process the submittal as follows. a. The Contractor will return a final copy with both the Architect's and Contractor's stamps, to the Architect for them to distribute to the Owner and A.O.R. Consultants. b. The Contractor will process and distribute a final copy, with both the Architect's and Contractor's stamps, to all appropriate parties to include the manufacturer, supplier or subcontractor for production. I I ENI) OF SECTION 013300 I I I I I I I WINCO STORE NC). 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-9 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 c �: SECTIONU 13)OU—INSPECTION,TESTING AND REPORTS(SI'E;CIAI.. INSPECTIONS) PART I - GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. See Specification Section 014000, Quality Requirements, for the general requirements for the quality control testing for both owner and contractor hired,testing requirements,also referred to as, Special Inspections. I 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS: 1 A. The Owner will provide and pay for testing, inspection and quality control services(Special Inspections) which are to be performed by an independent laboratory, or the Architect or Engineer of Record as required by IBC Section 1704. These inspections are in addition to the inspections required in IBC Section 110. 1. Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 033300 Architectural Concrete B. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all other testing, inspection and quality control services which are to be performed by an independent laboratory (different than the owner's testing agency unless previously approved by the owner),as required in the following sections of the specifications. C. Advance notification of 48 hours minimum shall be given the testing laboratory prior to the actual need for testing and/or inspection work required for any work made ready for such services. The Contractor shall be responsible for this function for all testing; including owner provided testing. D. The Contractor shall immediately commence to correct any work indicated by inspection and/or testing reports to have been found defective. The Contractor shall also call for retesting and/or inspection of corrected work,and shall bear the expense of such retesting and/or inspection work. E. The Contractor shall instruct the independent laboratory to deliver one (1) copy each, except as otherwise required,of all test and/or inspection reports to the following parties: 1 1. WinCo Foods, LLC, 650 N. Armstrong Place, Boise, Idaho 83704, Attn: Andrew Beall, Facilities Project Manager 2. General Contractor 3. Architect;Attn: Chad Pollock, Project Architect 4. Structural Engineer; Attn: Dave Sansotta 5. Any others,as directed by Owner. 6. Authority Having Jurisdiction; Attn: Project Building Inspector F. The Owner will select the independent laboratory for owners work and coordinate with contractor for their work. PART 2-- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) INSPECT"ION,TESTING AND REPORTS (SPECIAL INSPECTIONS) 013900- 1 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 PART 3 — EXECUTION N (Not Applicable) I END OF SECTION 013900 1 I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I 1 I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I INSPECTION,TESTING STING AND REPORTS (SPECIAL INSPECTIONS) 013900 2 I i WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 I SECTION 014000- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS I PART 1 -GENERAL i1.I RE1..ATE1) DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and Iquality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or I indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. I 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- Iassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract I)ocurnent requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required I by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during l execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. 1 13. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. II C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where II indicated, qualities of materials and execution,and to review construction,coordination,testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. illWINCO STORE NO.. (Sushi) 2 3 (Sus a Kiosk) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 D. Laboratory Mockups:s: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to a verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that arc performed specifically for the Project I before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. NVLAP,or a testing F.. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRIL„L,an agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant,mill,factory,or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. 1. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 'Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,erection, application,and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively 111 to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards_establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-2 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The testing agencies, regardless, if hired by the Owner or General Contractor shall submit written reports and distribute them as defined in Section 013900. B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following for each test, inspection or quality-assurance service performed: 1. Date of issue. 1 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address,and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and I inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 1 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-3 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 for installations of the or,s stemassembly, product that are similar to those indicated for this Yt Project in material, design,and extent. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTI., an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM 1548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having.jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2, NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 0. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material,design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Testing and Inspection Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as 111 Owner's responsibility,Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing I agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. a. See Specification Section 013900, Inspection, Testing & Reports (Special Inspections) for owner's responsibilities. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 3. Submit a certified written report of each quality control services and distribute as defined in Specification Section,013900, Inspection,Testing& Reports(Special Inspections). 4. Contractor shall notify testing agency 48 hours minimum in advance of testing. 13. Contractor Testing and Inspections responsibilities. Unless otherwise indicated,nit testing and -- inspection .services, not previously described and paid for by the owner, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. I 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. See specification Section 013900, Inspection, Testing & Reports (Special Inspections) for contractors responsibilities. b. Contractor shall not employ same testing agency engaged by Owner, unless authorized by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-4 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 3. Submit a certified written report of each quality-control service and distribute as defined in Specification Section 013900, Inspection,Testing& Reports(Special Inspections). 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties, Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service. See Section 013900. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work, 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. 0. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples,and similar activities. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 -5 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 11/13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES I A. Include General Contractor's testing agency on the list of subcontractors. I 3.2 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: I 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected, 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager reference during normal working hours. C. Daily Reports 1. The Testing and Inspection Agency shall deliver all reports to the Contractors On-Site Superintendant on a daily basis for review and shall be kept at the Job 'frailer for the duration of the Project. 2. The Testing and Inspection Agency shall also deliver all reports to the Architect's, Engineer's and Contractor's Project Managers within 24 hours of the delivery time/day the report was given to the Contractor's on-site Superintendent. 3.3 SUBCONTRACTORS' CERTIFICATES I FICATES A. The Contractor shall request Certificates from each subcontractor as specified, review to verify it is-valid and current and keep the following certificates in the on-site Job..Trailer which shall be readily available for review upon request. 1. Concrete Flatwork Finishers 2. Concrete Flatwork Technicians 3. Welding Certificates. I3. Any personnel on site working for one of the above trades without a current certificate filed on- site with the Contractor shall be asked to stop working until a current certificate is delivered to and verified with the Contractor. I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-C t WINCO FOODS, LI.,C. 11/13 3.4 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 1 A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." i3. Protect construction exposed by or or quality-control service activities. C, Repair and protection are Contractorf 's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. I END OF SECTION 01400(} I I I I i I I I I I 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-7 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 12/13 I SECTION 015000- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS I PART 1 -GENERAL it1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. I1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and 11, protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: I1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of " implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is I complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. I Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to,Owner's construction forces, Architect,occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having.jurisdiction. I13. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of Iservices as required for construction operations. 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 12/13 FACILITIES 1.5 LOCA l lON OF TEMPORARY A. Coordinate temporary facilities, (field office location) staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel with WinCo Construction Manager. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA,NEMA,and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NEPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Pacilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2- PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts,with 1-5/8-inch-(42-mm-)OD top rails. B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link I fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet(1.8 in) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-318- inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8- inch- (42-mm-) OI) top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 6 feet (1.8 m) high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch (50-by- 100-mm)rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet(2.4 m)apart. ./ D. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with Industry Standard requirements. E. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. F. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,respectively. G. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-2 II I WINCO FOODS, I..LC 12/13 I2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES I A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. I B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1, Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan I racks,and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than I receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack board. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F(20 to 22 deg C). I 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fe (215 lx) at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate Imaterials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. ID. Temporary Sign. I. Furnish and install a 4'x8' painted plywood sign announcing the New WinCo Foods. ICoordinate the location with WinCo Construction Manager and Authority Having Jurisdiction if required. A sign sheet is included at the end of this section. .11 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Pr otable, UL rated, with class and extinguishing agent as required by II locations and classes of fire exposures. I3. I-IVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. I. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating I units is prohibited. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. . 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for I temporary use during construction, provide filter with MIRV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-3 WINCO FOODS, LLC 12/13 I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 1 A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." I B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be111 interrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. 13. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system or private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 1 1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. I E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and-drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation,and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted,as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TEMPORARY FACiLITIIS AND CONTROLS 015000-4 I WINCO FOODS, I..,I.,C 12/13 IG. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary Ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction I from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. IH. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. L Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. I I. Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source,as directed by Owner. I J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations,observations, inspections,and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements II, without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install a minimum of one telephone line(s) for each field office or more as required by contractor. 1 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in Ieach field office. 2. At each telephone,post a list of important telephone numbers. 1 a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. Re. Contractor's home office, d. Architect's office. e. Engineers'offices. f. Owner's office. Ig. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. I L. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, Iincluding electronic mail, in common-use facilities. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION IA. General: Comply with the following: WINCO STORE NO. (Sushi Kiosk) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 5 WiNCO FOODS, 1.,1,C 12/13 1, Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within I construction area or within 30 feet(9 ni)of building lines. Comply with NEPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. 13. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement,and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. 1 C. Parking: Provide temporary or Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. II D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site,excavations,and construction free of water. I. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." I F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. I G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and 1111 equipment" and not temporary facilities. II. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders I are not adequate. 1. ExistingStair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are g cteened and maintained_-in a condition acceptable to Owner. At-Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers,devices,signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. i , J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.d SECURITY AND PROTICI'ION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct II construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TEMPORARY FACILITIES ANI)CONTROLS 015000-6 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 12/13 Iminimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. I. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." I B. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recomniencd practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using Ienvironmentally safe materials. C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially I completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism,theft,and similar violations of security. I D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. E. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types I needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NEPA 241. I 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning I sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 1 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL I A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated Iresults and to avoid possibility of damage. C. "Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. III D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than ISubstantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 7 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 12/13 have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, I clean exposed surfaces,and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities arc property of Contractor. I Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street I paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." I I END OF SECTION 015000 I I I I I I I I I WINCO STRNO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 8 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. I1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work Iincluding, but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. I 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. I 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. I 13. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property foundation survey and/or survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying Iservices of the kind indicated. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) EXECUTION 017300- I I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) I I'ART 3 - EXECUTION I. 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and I verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services. I B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate111 and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of i sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or I Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. i 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility or Owner that is necessary to I adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. I 13. Field Measurements: 'lake field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to 1 other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. I C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I EXECUTION 017300-2 1 IWINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 3,3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT I A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and WinCo Construction Manager promptly. 1 13. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. N 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain I 3. required dimensions. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. S. Notify Architect and WinCo Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. IC. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. iD. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and I levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and WinCo Construction Manager. I 3,4 FIELD ENGINEERING IA. Identification: Owner furnished survey will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. I B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1 I. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect or WinCo Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed I permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect and WinCo Construction Manager before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base Ireplacements on the original survey control points. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) EXECUTION 017300-3 I WINCO FOODS, E.,I_C 03/13 C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. • Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. I 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. 3.5 INSTALLATION I A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. . Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes,ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. II D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. I E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requ irements. I 0. • Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place,accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. I 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2, Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) EXECUTION 017300-4 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. I 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule J for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation j conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. I 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas frequently, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. I. Comply with requirements in NEPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F(27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 13. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. I I. 2. Remove liquid spills promptly. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) EXECUTION 017300- 5 WINCO FOODS, LI_,C 03/13 F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing I waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous,damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. I 3.8 S'T'ARTING AND ADJUSTING I A. Start, equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units,and retest. 13. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installedWorkis withoutrlamage I or deterioration at-time of Substantial Completion. 13. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) EXECUTION 017300-6 WINCO FOODS, LAX 03/13 C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are to view b exposedif surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. 111 E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 I I I I I I I 1 1 I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) EXECUTION 017300-7 1 WINCO FOODS, L.A.,C 03/13 I SECTION 017329-CUTTING AND PATCHING I PART 1 -GENERAL I1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. I1,2 SUMMARY IA. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 13. Related Sections include the following: I 1. Division 01 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" foe demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to I cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS IA. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. I13. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. I B. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. IC Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. I D. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational I life or safety. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) . CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329- 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in. visual i evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 111 A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut._ 13. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage ' to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to he removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. If services interruption is unavoidable, coordinate with WinCo Construction Manager and Utility to schedule date, time and length of interruption. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329-2 1 WINCO FOODS, EEC 03/]3 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. II. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding,and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not ' hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent ' entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling,repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. ' 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish,color,texture,and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. ' a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329-3 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 W containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane ' surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils,putty, and similar materials. ' END OF SECTION 017329 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329- 4 WINCO FOODS, LLC 3/14 ISECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. I 1.2 SUMMARY IA. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: I 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. 4. Systems Integration 5. Requirements for final payment, including final Change Order Requests and release of retainage. I6, Grand Opening Trade Representatives/On-Site Requirements. B. Related Sections include the following: I 1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. I 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications,and Record Product Data. 4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance I 5, manual requirements. Division 01 "General Commissioning Requirements" for specific commissioning requirements. I 6. DiVisron 22 "Commissioning of Plumbing" for specific commissioning of plumbing requirements. 7. Division 23 "Commissioning of HVAC Systems" for specific commissioning of HVAC requirements. I 8. Division 23 "Commissioning of Refrigeration" for specific commissioning of refrigeration requirements. 9. Division 26 "Commissioning of Electrical" for specific commissioning of electrical I requirements. 10. Divisions 02 through 49 Specification Sections for specific closeout.and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. IC. Closeout Documents 1. Except for the Systems Integration and Commissioning Services timeline requirements I which are explained in Paragraph 3.2 all other required closeout documents that are listed in Paragraphs 1.2A and B shall be submitted as follows. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 111 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700- I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 3/14 2. Project Record Documents I a. One (1) set of hard copy record Drawings and Specifications shall be delivered to the store by the Contractor and placed on the rack and shelf on the front platform I above the cart storage. b. All other closeout documents required shall be submitted to the Architect of Record in electronic format on disk(s). The Architect of Record shall review all I electronic documents and notify the contractor as to the completion of the closeout. Once completed, the Architect of Record shall copy to a flash drive all Closeout requirements and transmit to the Owner. I 3. The Contractor shall complete and submit all electronic closeout documents to the Architect of Record and deliver and mount the hard copy set of drawings and specifications to the store within thirty(30)days of substantial completion. I 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION I A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion and request final payment,complete the following: I 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures". Include any final accounting for changes to the contract amount and all final payment lien releases. 2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, I equipment,and systems. 4. Submit all final meter readings for all utilities, statements of stored fuel and all final accounting for utility switch over and payment for stored fuel if required. I 5. Submit Consent of Surety to final payment(if required). 6. Certificate of Occupancy. 7. Contractor Affidavit. 8. Final Property Survey. I 9. See Section 017823 for O&M Manuals. 10. See Section 017839 for Record Documents. 11. Polished Concrete System Acceptance Form. I 12. Paging System final approval check list per Section 275116. ITVAC completion checklist p'i Section 230000. 14. . Equipment Inventory Forms and Refrigerant Tracking Forms per Section 019115. 15. The 11VAC, ISMS and Refrigeration Commissioning shall be completed, the commissioning report submitted to the proper contractors and the punch list items completed prior to submitting for retainage. The commissioning report (punch list) and the response letters stating completion of the correction items shall be part of the close out package. See Paragraph 3.3.A. 16. Also submit the previously submitted "Pad Certificate" with the Closeout Documents Package. I B. Reinspection: Prepare a final Certificate for Payment after reinspection. WinCo Construction Manager will notify Contractor of construction items that must be completed or corrected 1 before final certificate for payment will be accepted. 1. Reinspection will be repeated if necessary. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-2 WINCO FOODS, LLC 3/14 111 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the 1 Project Manual. 1. Submit warranties and bonds in electronic format on disk(s). ' 2. Provide a "Table of Contents to identify the product or installation with a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address,and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each disk on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name,and name of Contractor. B. Include copies of each warranty as required for each operation and maintenance disk. 1.5 RETAINAGE, FINAL PAYMENT AND FINAL CI-IANGE ORDER REQUESTS ' A. WinCo Foods, LLC will not release retainage until all work is 100% complete to include all punch list corrections and all project closeout procedures listed in this Specification Section 017700 are completed and submitted to and approved by the Architect of Record. Retainage ' will not he reduced below the maximum amount allowed by statutory limits before final payment. ' 13. Upon receipt of final payment, to include retainage, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner within 24 hours, the final Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens with no exceptions listed and includes all Unconditional Releases and Waivers of Liens from the Contractor, ' Subcontractors and Material and Equipment Suppliers. C. All final Contractor's Change Order Requests shall be submitted to the Architect of Record within fifteen (15) consecutive days from the Substantial Completion Date. Any Contractor ' Change Order Requests received after that date, will not be accepted, unless specifically directed by the Owner,to accept the"C.O.R.". ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or ' fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply ' with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-3 FOODS, [..LC 3/14 I W1NC0 13. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each I surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification I of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, I including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter,and other foreign substances that are the cause of building construction. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other I foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from I. Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. If. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. I g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches, equipment vaults,manholes,attics,and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. I i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish I mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. .j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and I electrical nameplates and glazing labels. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. I Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign --substanees. m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. I n, Clean plumbing fixtures 1:0 a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,registers,and grills. I p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply I with requirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or I excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-4 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 3/14 3,2 SYSTEMS IN"I-'IGRA'I'ION A. Systems Integration for ISMS and Refrigeration Controls: I. The control systems integration shall begin on day 176 of construction. An Owner provided Systems Integrator shall be on site starting on this date and will provide the Contractor with the control system HMI, strategies, VAV Box calibration requirements and the point-to-point checkout lists. 2. A pre-systems integration meeting will be held approximately 4 weeks prior to the start of systems integration to discuss the timing of the visits and expectations of the contractor. During this meeting a checklist will be provided to the contractor with a list of items that need to be completed prior to the start of systems integration. The contractor is ' required to complete these items and will be held responsible for additional costs incurred by the systems integrator as a result of incomplete work, 3. The Contractor shall review all system strategies for correct operation and provide a list of concerns to the Systems Integrator for review by day 189. 4. The Contractor shall complete the VAV Box Calibration and the point-to point checkout lists and return to the Systems Integrator no latter than day 191. ' 3.3 COMMISSIONING CLOSEOUT A. Commissioning for IIVAC, Refrigeration and BMS: ' 1. The first Commissioning Inspection by Owner Representative (Commissioning Inspector) shall begin on day 197 of construction, which is immediately following the completion of the BMS and Refrigeration Systems Integration. The first Commissioning Inspection shall be completed within 5 days from start of inspection (day 201 of construction). All commissioning inspections shall be conducted jointly by the Commissioning Inspector/Engineer, WinCo Construction Manager and the Contractor's ' Superintendent. 2. The second Commissioning Inspection by Owner Representative (Commissioning ' Inspector) shall begin on day 211 of construction. The second Commissioning Inspection shall be completed within 5 days from the start of the inspection (day 215 of construction). During this Inspection, the Commissioning Inspector shall continue to verify that systems are operating and installed as intended and per the contract documents, confirm the completion of the work by the Contractor(s) involved and verify that all corrections are in compliance with the contract documents. ' 3. The third Commissioning Inspection by Owner Representative (Commissioning Inspector) shall begin I day prior to Soft Grand Opening, and be completed Soft Grand Opening Day. During this Inspection, the Commissioning Inspector shall provide Owner I training on general system operation, continue to verify that systems are operating and installed as intended and per the contract documents, confirm the completion of the work by the Contractor(s) involved, and verify that all corrections are in compliance with the ' contract documents. 4. The Commissioning Inspector shall complete and distribute the Issues Report (Punch List) on a daily basis from the start date of commissioning (Day 197) to completion date (Soft Grand Opening Day). WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-5 WINCO FOODS, LLC 3/14 5. The Commissioning Inspector shall complete and distribute a Final Commissioning 1 Report containing all Pre-functional Testing Forms completed by the Contractor, Functional Testing Forms completed by the Commissioning Inspector, and complete Issues Report within 10 days of Soft Grand Opening. The Commissioning Inspector shall distribute electronically the Final Commissioning Report to each recipient listed in Paragraph 3.3.A.6. For new issues that are discovered after the Final Commissioning Report has been distributed, the Commissioning Inspector shall notify the recipients in Paragraph 3.3.A.6 electronically prior to documenting the issue on the Issues Report. 6. The Commissioning inspector shall distribute electronically the Issues and Commissioning Reports to the ibllowing persons: a. WinCo Foods, LLC; Attn: David Van Etten, Vice President Construction b. WinCo Foods, LLC;Mtn: Andrew Beall,Construction Manager c. Bruce W. Petersen,NCARB: Attn: Chad Pollock, Project Architect d. 'General Contractor/; Attn:/fill in appropriate name/,Project Manager 7. Within 3 days after completion of required corrective work, the General Contractor shall 1 complete and distribute a written response to the Owner, Architect of Record and Commissioning Inspector. The response shall state that the items listed in the Issues and Commissioning Reports are completed or if not, list why and when the item(s) are anticipated to be completed. Responses shall include item completion dates, photos documenting correction(s) and Contractor initials. Send the response electronically to each recipient listed in Paragraph 3.3.A.6. This shall be completed no later than day 214 of construction. 8. The fourth Commissioning Inspection by Owner Representative (Commissioning Inspector) shall begin approximately 11 months after Substantial Completion. This fourth Commissioning Inspection shall be completed within 2 days from the start of the inspection. During this Inspection,the Commissioning Inspector shall verify that systems are operating as intended and per the contract documents, confirm the completion of the work by the Contractor(s) involved and verify that all corrections are in compliance with the contract documents. 9. The Commissioning Inspector shall complete and distribute a Final Issues Report within 10 days of fourth Commissioning Inspection completion. The Commissioning Inspector shall distribute electronically the Final issues Report to each recipient listed in Paragraph 3.3.A.6. END O.1+SECTION 017700 ' 1 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-6 111 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 r SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 111 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing the electronic format on disks containing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: Ii. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, systems and equipment. B. See Divisions 02 through 49 Specification Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. C. Review the following sections for 0& M requirements for Commissioning. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for specific operation and I 2. maintenance manual requirements for commissioning. Division 22 Section "Commissioning of Plumbing" for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for commissioning of plumbing. ' 3. Division 23 Section "Commissioning of HVAC Systems" for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for commissioning of HVAC. 4. Division 23 Section "Commissioning of Refrigeration" for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for commissioning of refrigeration. ' 5. I.)ivision 26 Section "Commissioning of Electrical" for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for commissioning of electrical. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. All Manuals: Submit two copies of each disk containing the O&M Manuals with the final closeout package to the Architect for review, The Architect will review and request additional information if required. Once completed,the Architect will forward the closeout package to the Owner. I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS ON ELECTRONIC DISK(S),GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each disk showing each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each disk shall contain a title page and a table of contents, of the manual contents. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 B. Electronic Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address,and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect and appropriate Engineer. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Electronic Table of Contents: List each product included in the manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. , D. Manual Contents: Organize into disk(s) to arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system onto a single disk. 1. Electronic Disks: CD or I)VD disk as required to get the information required on one disk. ' a. Identify each disk on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Prepare and scan dividers for each section to coincide with the Table of Contents. Include a list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Scan required Drawings and include in the manual: , a. If oversize drawings are necessary, scan drawing as is, into a pdf format. 1 2.2 ELECTRONIC DISK(S) FOR OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual—Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, derating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements all on electronic disk(s). ' B. Descriptions: Scan and include or prepare the following electronic information for description of projects in the Operations Manual: ' 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. ' 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. I WINC()STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -2 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 �. I C. Operating I rocedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and 1 required sequences for electric or electronic systems. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. I E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.3 ELECTRONIC DISK(S) FOR PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL IA. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and Isources,and warranties and bonds,as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and I telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Scan and include or prepare the following, as applicable electronic information: Ii. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. I5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions. I E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 2.4 ELECTRONIC DISK(S) FOR SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include I source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts,and warranty and bond information,as described below. I 13. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, Iand cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) OPERATION ANI)MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -3 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment: D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions,(and demonstration and training videotape if available),that detail essential maintenance procedures: E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of ' required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with 1 parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRONIC DISK(S) MANUAL PREPARATION A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care 1 and maintenance of each product, material,and finish incorporated into the Work. 13. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, scan and 1 include sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work and tie to Table of Contents. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents:--Identify data applicable to the Work and-tie to-Table of Contents. Delete references to information not applicable. END OF SECTION 01.7€323 1 i 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -4 WINCO FOODS, LLC 0 3/13 I SECTION 017839- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS I PART 1 -GENERAL, I1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record IDocuments, including the following: 1. Record Drawings(hardcopies and electronic copies(PDF). 1 2. Record Specifications(hardcopies and electronic copies(PDF). B. Related Sections include the following: 1 1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance I manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1 1.3 SUI.3MI'TTAL,S IA. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Electronic Copies: Scan and submit one (1) complete set of Marked up Record Prints to the Architect on a disk in `PDP' format as part of the Closeout Package. I The Architect shall notify the Contractor as to the completion of the Closeout and once completed,the A.O.R. shall forward to Owner. I13. Record Specifications: Comply with the following: I. Number of Electronic Copies: Scan and submit one (1) copy of the marked up and/or I revised Project Manual including Specifications, Addenda and Contract modifications to the Architect on disk in `PDI'' format as part of the Closeout Package. The Architect shall notify the Contractor as to the completion of the Record Drawings and once completed,the A.O.R.. shall forward to the Owner. 111 IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839- 1 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS I A. Record Prints: During Construction Maintain one set of black-line white prints of the Contract I Drawings. I. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, ' whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints as supervised by the Contractor's Superintendant. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be I difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing techniclue. I c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include,but are not limited to,the following: I a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. II d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. I j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. im. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish I between changes for different categories of the Work at s;tueLlocairon. 4. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted omitted I from original Drawings. 5. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing Sheet; include the designation "PROJECT 111 RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. I. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints to follow original contract drawing layout and I identify as follows: a. Date. 1 b. Designation"PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." WiNCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-2 I WiNCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 c. Name of WinCo Construction Manager. d. Name of Architect and Architect's Project Manager. ' e. Name of Contractor and Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendant. 2,2RI:E.CORI) PROJECT MANUAL, INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Project Manual including Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda,and contract modifications. 1. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, subcontractors and other information necessary to provide a record of changes made. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of the drawings and Project Manual including specifications during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur to avoid missing the recordation of the changes made. DO NOT WAIT UNTIL THE END OF THE PROJECT TO RECORD THE INFORMATION. 13. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and 1 in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's and WinCo Construction Manager reference during site visits. 3.2 FINAL PROCESSING OF DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL. A. Before mounting the hard copy of Record Drawings in the store, SCAN the Record Drawings to an electronic disk for delivery to the Architect. ' 1. Deliver disk to the Architect with Closeout Package for review. 2. Place record drawings in PVC tube as described on Sheet A2.1, Keyed Note 23. 13, Before placing the hard copy of the Record Project Manual including Specifications in the store, SCAN the Project Manual including Specifications,Addenda and Contract Modifications. 1. Deliver disk to Architect with Closeout Package for review. END OF SECTION 017839 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01.7839-3 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I SECTION 024119- SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 1 PART I -GENERAL I1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS IA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. I13. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for use of premises and Owner-occupancy requirements. I 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures. I1.3 DEFINITIONS I A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. I B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not Iotherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged,or removed and reinstalled. I1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their I contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119- 1 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 1. Detailed sequence of selectivedemolition and removal work, with starting and ending 111 dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. Include demolition activities on Project Schedule. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff,capping,and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. I 5. Locations of proposed dust-and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress. 6. Coordination of Owners continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. 13. Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit such evidence to WinCo Construction Manager for review prior to demolition operations. I C. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. D. Construction Waste Management and Disposal Submittals to include: Construction Waste Management Plan, Contractor's Final Reuse, Recycling and Disposal Report and Cost/Revenue Analysis. Refer to Specification Section 017419. 1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition if required. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. II D.- - Prcdemo-I tion Conference:—Conduct confe.rence to review methods and—procedures-elated to selective demolition including,but not limited to,the following: I 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 -2 1. 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 1.7 PROJECT'T'CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." 13. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: A report has been prepared as to whether hazardous materials are present in the building. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered during construction, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract or will arrange with contractor to remove the hazardous material under this contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials SO as not to void existing warranties. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 111 B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. ' WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-3 I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 3.2 UIILIIY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." I B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1 1. Coordinate with WinCo Construction Manager and arrange to shut off indicated services/systems with Utility Companies. 111 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed I with removal of the wall. I 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal I operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. I. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section 1 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent I injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and I to and from occuplcTtportions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage111 and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls,ceilings, floors,and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. LI. Cover and protect furniture,furnishings,and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction I being demolished. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-4 I WiNCO MOODS, LLC 03/13 ,. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 1 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION,GENERAL I A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: I1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. I 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and I chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 1 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire- I suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. C. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and I 7. promptly dispose of offsite. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to I impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. IIB. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint I • equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new I materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. II C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their Ioriginal locations after selective demolition operations are complete. I IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-5 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 3.5 SELECTIVE LE � 1-'IVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS I A, Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to I remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. 13. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctureS with construction to remain, 1 using power-driven saw,then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and 1 remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the I methods recommended by RFCI. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 07 Section for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories as identified on I drawings. F. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants if required. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISI-HED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3_- -Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or-other-device_that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 13. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 111C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 111 3 .7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 1 ENI) OF SECTION 024119 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I SELECTR IVE STUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-6 I f WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 I SECTION 033000-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures,and finishes, for the following: I. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Suspended slabs. 5. Site Paving. 6. Aggregate Base. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 3. Division 003132 Section"Geotechnical Data"for soils report. 4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The latest version of each document shall be assumed for use in this specification. B. American Concrete Institute(ACI): 1. AC! 117—Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. 2. ACI 301 --Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 305.1 -- Hot Weather Concreting. 4. AC1306.1 -•-Cold Weather Concreting. 5. AC1318—Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 6. AC1347—Formwork for Concrete. 7. ACI SP66—AC1 Detailing Manual. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36—Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 615—Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A706—Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ' WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 4. ASTM C 31 -Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 5. ASTM C 33-Concrete Aggregates. 6. ASTM C 39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 7. ASTM C 94.--Ready-Mixed Concrete. 8. AS'C'M C 136-Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates. 9. ASTM C 150-Portland Cement. 10. ASTM.C 172--Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 11. ASTM C 403 -Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance. • 12. ASTM C 494-Chemical Admixtures of Conrete. 13. ASTM C 618 ._ Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 14. ASTM C 702--Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size. 15. ASTM C 881 -Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 16. ASTM C 989 --Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 17. ASTM C 1218-Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 18. ASTM C 1602-Mixing Water used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 19. ASTM D 75-Sampling Aggregates. 20. ASTM D 98-Calcium Chloride. 21. ASTM D 448-Classification for Sizes of Aggregates for Road and Bridge Construction. 22. ASTM D 698 -Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb(2.49 Kg) Hammer and 12-in(305 mm) Drop. 23. ASTM D 1241 -Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses. 24. ASTM E 1 155 -Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F-Number System (Inch-found Units). 25. ASTM 11643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 26. ASTM E 1745 - Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. D. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.4--Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel institute(CRSI): �. 1. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars, F. --Nationa Ready=M-ixe d-Concrete Association: 1. NRMCA Inspection Standards. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Owner or Separate Contractor Responsibilities: The following provisions are provided as I information to Contractor with respect to the responsibilities of the Owner or separate contractors doing work on, or related to, the building floor slab construction. The Owner or separate contractors must: 1. Notify Contractor's superintendent i week prior to start of work at Site. Provide names and contact phone numbers to Contractor's superintendent. 2. Coordinate work and schedule activities with floor slab construction to avoid interference and to minimize detrimental effects to floor finish. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-2 1 WINCH FOODS, EEC 01/15 3. Comply with floor protection measures as specified in this Section and as described in Contractor's Concrete Floor Protection Plan. 4, Damage to concrete floor finish determined by WinCo to be the responsibility of Owner or separate contractor will be repaired in accordance with approved methods, materials, and personnel at the expense of Owner or separate contractor. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. I 1.6 SLAW IT"T'ALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Submit submittal items concurrently for submittals shown with the same submittal date specified in the Concrete Submittal Register included at the end of this Section. Do not submit submittals of this section together with submittals in any other section. C. Sieve Analysis for Aggregate I3ase System: Submit current sieve analysis for aggregate base and choker material. D. Concrete Batch Plant Certification: Submit name and address of concrete supplier's batch plant and plant certification(s) by National Ready-Mix Concrete Association. E. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Submit the Design Mixtures to the A.U.R., who shall route the Mix Designs to both the Structural Engineer and the T&I Agency for comments from both. a. If the comments from the Structural Engineer and the T&I Agency are significantly different in their approval, the A.O.R. shall initiate a conference call between all parties to resolve any differences and decide whose comments shall govern and decide on a course of action. b. Provide Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form (at the end of this section) for each Iconcrete nix design. . Include applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal Form including the following: II) Proportions of cementitious materials, fine and course aggregate, and water. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project Site. 2) Water cementitious material ratio, 28-day compressive design strength, slump, and air content. 3) Type of cement, fly ash,slag, and aggregate. 4) Individual aggregate gradation. 5) Special requirements for pumping. 6) Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. WINCO STORE;NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 t WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 7) Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, 11 } or finishing techniques to achieve finished product specified. d. Attachments to Concrete Mix Design: Submit the following as attachments to be included with the Concrete Mix Design: 1) Sieve Analysis Reports for Concrete Aggregate: Provide separate reports of particle distribution, calculating cumulated percentages passing for all individual aggregates required on the mix form. Sieve analysis sampling and testing for each aggregate source shall be conducted within 60 days of concrete submittal date. 2) Concrete Aggregate Supplier Statement: a) Stating if aggregate is possibly alkali-reactive, based on tests or past services. b) Stating if aggregate can possibly cause pop-outs, "D" cracking, or other disruptions due to moisture gain, freezing,or other mechanisms, based on tests or past service. 3) Time of Initial Setting: Initial setting time in accordance with ASTM C 403. F. Concrete Supplier Approval: Statement of Acceptance of Concrete Supplier as described in Quality Assurance paragraph. C. Submit one of the following methods for mixing the concrete per ASTM C 94/C 94M-13a: a. Central-Mixed Concrete b. Truck-Mixed Concrete: 1) The manufacturer shall include the total minimum and maximum number of truck drum revolutions allowed for mixing. H. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections,tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. I. Welding, ACI Technician, and Finisher certificates. See Specification section 014000, I paragraph 3.3A for certificate requirements. J. Qualification Data: For manufacturer testing agency. I K. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1 I. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. I L. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. III 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Curing compounds. 111 5. Floor and slab treatments. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-4 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. i). Semirigid joint filler. 10. Joint-filler strips. I11. Repair materials. M. Delivery Tickets: II. Copies of delivery tickets for each load of concrete delivered to site. 2. Indicate information required by ASTM C 94 on each ticket:including. 3. Information on ticket shall include quantities of all materials batched including the amount of free water in the aggregate and the quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water cement ratio of the approved mix design. Aggregate moisture corrections shall be based on ASTM definitions of aggregate moisture content and absorption. 4. Mix identification number on ticket shall match number on submitted and approved mix design. N. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances. O. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. P. Minutes of preinstallation conference and preinstallation Check List listed under section 3.16, Field Quality Control. Q. Post installed anchors. Include qualifications for installers per section 3.18. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer shall be either an ACL certified Flatwork Technician, or an ACI certified Flatwork Finisher depending on the job performed. No Technicians shall be allowed to finish flatwork concrete, and the concrete crew foreman shall be an ACE certified Finisher with a minimum of 3 years experience. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M-13a requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NR.MCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." 1 C. Concrete Truck Inspection: 1. Conform to ASTM C 94, NRMCA and Department of Transportation standards in state I 2. where Project is located with respect to truck mixer requirements. Perform inspections immediately before starting concreting operations. 3. Record the identification numbers of those trucks found to be acceptable on the basis of inspections. ' WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5 I I W[N{�U FOODS, LLC Ul/15 4. 1)o not bring on site for concreting operations, any truck whose identification numbers I are not recorded as acceptable. Notify Contractor's superintendent if non-conforming trucks are used to deliver concrete. D. Concrete Supplier Approval: Concrete Supplier and materials provided shall be fully approved by and acceptable to Concrete Subcontractor as the producer of concrete which Subcontractor is to place and finish. Prepare Statement of Approval of Concrete Supplier stating project name, name of concrete supplier,along with the statement of approval and signatures of the Contractor and Concrete Floor Subcontractor. Submit statement as specified in Submittals paragraph. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,acceptable to authorities having 1 g Y jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM F 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM F 548. II 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,Grade 1,according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade 1. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an AC1-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician- Grade II. 1 F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant,obtain aggregate from one source,and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." I-I. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: I 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. AC1 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials," except thickness of concrete slabs on grade—V4"+ 1". 3. AC1 302,"Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 1. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to review concrete mixture_designss See 1,4:13:2 and 3.16__ of this section. J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site by Owner's Testing and II Inspection Agency to review all T&I procedures as well as items listed in this section 3.16. 1. Review the concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of I concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast- in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Owner's Representative. c. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE? 033000-6 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 d. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. e. Concrete subcontractor. f. Architect of Record and Structural Engineer if requested by the Owner. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semi rigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. K. Preinstallation checklist: The Owner's Construction Manager, or if unavailable, the Contractor's Superintendant shall conduct the Preinstallation checklist as listed in section 3.17 prior to pouring any concrete. Attendees shall be the same as 1-1.1.a-f above. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Deliver materials in unopened containers with labels identifying contents. Keep containers closed and upright to prevent leakage. C. Mark reinforcing, accessories and embedded items for proper identification and placement location. D. Deliver,store,and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. E. Store materials, except aggregate, off ground in dry area and in manner to prevent damage. Protect liquid materials from freezing. F. Stockpile aggregate in manner to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes • of aggregates. Do not use bottom 6 inches of aggregate piles on contact with ground. Allow sand to drain until it has reached uniform moisture content before it is used. G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. H. Store admixtures in manner to prevent contamination. Protect admixtures from extreme temperatures which would adversely affect their characteristics. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Hot and Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with AC1 305.1 (hot weather) and 306.1 (cold weather). B. Concreting in Hot, Dry or Windy Weather: Comply with AC1 301 and as follows: 1. Temperature of concrete at time of placing:Not to exceed 95 degrees F. 2. Determine rate of evaporation in accordance with ACI 305.1. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 7 1 WINCO FOODS, LI_.0 01/15 Employ y as required to protect fresh concrete before and during finishing 111 3. l } precautions1 when the concrete rate of evaporation exceeds 0.1 pounds per square foot per hour or when any combination of concrete materials and weather conditions are favorable for the 111 formation of plastic shrinkage cracks. a. Cool ingredients before mixing to reduce concrete temperature at time of placement. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing water. 4. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots,or dry areas. 5. Maintain an accurate reading thermometer at the Site to check temperature of concrete. 6. Reject concrete if more than one slump adjustment, as defined in ASTM C 94, is required. 7. Do not place concrete when forms, subgrade, aggregate base or reinforcement bars are more than 120 degrees F or the temperature differential between the forms, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars and concrete will create conditions favorable for settlement cracks or thermal cracking. 111 C. Concreting in Cold Weather: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,freezing actions,or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. 4. Minimum concrete, base surface, and ambient building air temperature shall be 55 degrees F during placement and throughout curing period. Measure and record concrete temperature during protection period at regular time intervals, but not less than 3 times per 24 hours. 5. Do not place slabs on subgrade, or base that is more than 20 degrees F cooler than concrete. Warm subgrade, or base to decrease temperature differential to 20 degrees F or less. 6. Do not use invented combustion heaters during concrete fete placement so as to prevent exposure o- I ,. . . • - e $ _ _ carbon monoxide (CO). During concrete placement and-curing periods, maximum. CO2 levels shall be 4,500 parts per million and maximum CO levels shall be 15 parts per million at concrete surface within 5 feet of any source of exhaust gases to minimize potential damage to concrete. I D. Placing Environment: 1. Sales floor concrete shall be placed within a completely enclosed structure, after the roof membrane is completely installed and weather tight. 2. Roof construction, R` tJs, skylight installation, overhead painting, and roof drainage system shall be complete and weather tight prior to placement of slabs. Protect concrete from precipitation until adequate strength is gained to prevent damage. 3. Lighting: Provide adequate lighting for slab placing and finishing procedures. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 8 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. • 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 AGGREGATE BASE AND CHOKER MATERIALS A. Aggregate Base Material: 1. Gradation: Gradation shall conform to one of the following: a. Any state DOT approved road base material meeting the following gradation: Standards Sieve Size % Passin 1-1/2" _ 100 No. 4 15-55 No. 200 3-12 b. Material conforming to the General Requirements and of the Gradation "A", "C", or "D" requirements (with the modified allowance of 5% to 12% passing the No. ' 200 sieve)as defined by ASTM D 1241. 2 Material passing the No. 200 sieve shall be clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. B. Aggregate Choker Material: Clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. Use one of the following gradations: 1. ASTM D 448 No. 10 with 6% to 12% passing No. 200 sieve. 2. Materials meeting the following gradation: Standards Sieve Size % Passing No. 4 — —.—.. No. 8 85-100 75-95 No. 16 55-75 No. 50 22-45 N — --- -- o. 100 10-30 No. 200 6-12 . 2.3 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of'joints. 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-9 1 I. WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 1. Plywood, approved metal,or other a d P anel materials. I 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: I a. High-density overlay,Class I or better. b. B-B (Concrete Form),Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. I/ B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to 111 resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC,or rubber strips,3/4 by 3/4 inch(19 by 19 mm), minimum. III E. Rustication Strips: Wood,metal, PVC,or rubber strips,kerfed for ease of form removal. F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. I G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will Ieave no corrodible metal closer than 1 1/2 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 2.4 STEEL 1 EL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60(Grade 420),-deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M,deformed. I C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. 2,5 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 10 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 B. Plate Dowels I 1. Provide plate dowels consisting of smooth steel plate bars, ASTM A 36 steel. Provide one of the following: a. Diamond Dowel System by PNA Construction Technologies, size 1/4 inch x 4-1/2 Ib. inch dowels. EZform EZdowel (including EZform Board) by McTech, Inc., size 6-1/4 inch x 3- 1/2 inch x 1/4 inch. C. Speed Plate System by Greenstreak, size 1/4 inch x 4 inch x 6 inch dowels. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers,and other devices for spacing, supporting,and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel I wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRS1's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: II. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class I plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. U. Mechanical Couplers: Mechanical coupler for splicing reinforcing. I1. Available products: Ia. DS Bar-Lock Coupler System; Dayton Superior. 2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS > I A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project for each building component: I1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I/II Ia. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989,Grade 100 or 120. IB. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33,Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and Icementitious materials. I. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: a. Building Footings and Foundation Walls: 1-1/2 inch (25 mm)nominal. b. Interior Slabs on Ground: 1-1/2 inch (25 mm) nominal c. Suspended Slabs: I inch(25 mm)nominal. d. Site Work: I inch (25 mm)nominal. e. The maximum size of an aggregate is the smallest sieve size through which the major portion of the aggregate must pass, with 1% to 5% retained on the nominal maximum size sieve. 1 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-1N-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- I I I 1 WINCO FOODS, LEC 01/I5 3. Adjust proportions of combined coarse, intermediate, at fine aggregates to provide the following particle size distribution characteristics, unless otherwise approved: a. Coarseness Factor of 60 to 75%. 1) The Coarseness Factor (CF) is the percentage of combined aggregate retained on the#8 sieve that is also retained on the 3/8 inch sieve. 2) The Coarseness Factor is calculated as follows: CF=Aggregate retained on 3/8"sieve/Aggregate retained on #8 sieve. b. Adjusted Workability Factor: I) The Workability Factor (WF) is the percent of combined aggregate that passes the#8 sieve. 2) The Adjusted Workability Factor(Adj-WF) is calculated as follows: Adj-WF=WF-i- [(Cementitious Material—564 lbs)/37.6] c. Combined percent retained on any given sieve size shall not exceed 24%. d. See coarseness factor at the end of this Section. 4. Aggregrate gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 may be waived in order to meet ranges specified. C. Water: ASTM C 1602. 2.7 ADMIXTURES 11 A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 1 B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. I 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing / Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F or Type G. Do not use high-range, Type F or Type 0, or all range water reducing admixtures at Type F dosage rates for slabs-on-ground or elevated slabs. C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor 1 or mixed cathodic-and anodic inhibitor capable_Of forming;n bat?ie,r ii -mititmirifg chloride reactionswith steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type C. I 1. Available Products: a. Boral Material Technologies, Inc.; Boral BCN. 111 b. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Eucon CIA. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace&Co.; DC1. d. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete CNI. e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI. 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) f CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 12 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 D. - Corrosion- Inhibiting Set-Accelerating Corrosion Inhibiting /admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set- accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete, 1. Available Products: a. Axim Concrete Technologies;Catexol I000CI. b. Bora! Material Technologies, Inc.; I3oral BCN2. e. Cortec Corporation; MCI 2000. d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace& Co.; DCI-S. e. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete 222+. f. Sika Corporation; FerroGard-901. I 2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM 11745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Available Products: a. Fortifher Corporation; Moistop Ultra A. b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10. c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type- 105. B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 2.9 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densities concrete surfaces. 1. Available Products: a. Burke by Edoco;Titan Hard. h. ChemMasters;ChemisiI Plus. c. ChemTec International; ChemTec One. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Intraseal. e. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula, is Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard. g. Euclid Chemical Company(the), Euco Diamond Hard. it. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard. i. I.,&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard, k. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver. 1. Nox-Crete Products Group,Kinsman Corporation; Duranox. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 13 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 m. Symons Corporation,a Dayton Superior Company; Buff Iard, n. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Industraseal. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS. I 2.10 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. L Available Products: a. Axim Concrete Technologies;Cimfilm. b. Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. f. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Etrcobar. g. Kaufman Products', Inc.; Vapor Aid. h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. j. MBI Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex;Confilm. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. I. Metaicrete Industries; Waterhold. in. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofrlm. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. Symons Corporation,a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid. p. Unitex; Pro-Film. q. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Monofilm ER. III r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.;Certi-Vex EnvioAssist. B. Absorptive Cover: AASIITO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m)when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I. Class B, dissipating. 1. Available Products: I a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; All Curing Compound#2 DR WB. b. Burke by Edoco; Aqua Resin Cure. c, ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; W,B. Resin Cure. e. 111 Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure(.1-11-W). WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 14 I 111 W INC.O FOODS, LLC 01/15 f. Euclid Chemical Company("I'hc); Kurc,z DR VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear. I. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; 1.AM Cure R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. I k. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure 1 . I. Symons Corporation,a Dayton Superior Company; Resi-Chert Clear Cure. m. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure WI3 30. n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. Io. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Maxcure Resin Clear. P. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. I F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating,certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. II. Available Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; All Clear Cure WB. I b. Burke by Edoco; Spartan Cote WB II. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure&Seal 20, d. Conspec Marketing& Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Cure I e. and Seal WI3. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-I8). f. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Aqua Cure VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure& Seal 309 Emulsion, h. Lambert Corporation;Glazecote Sealer-20. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress& Seal W13. ,j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. k. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure. I. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Cure& Seal 150E. m. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Cure& Seal 18 Percent E. n. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Clearseal W13 150. o. Unitex; Hydro Seal. P. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Flydrasheen 15 percent Iq. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309. G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class 13, 18 I to 25 percent solids, nondissipating,certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. Available Products: II. a. Burke by Edoco; Spartan Cote WB 1120 Percent. b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. I c. Conspec Marketing& Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; High Seal. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (.1-19). e. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Diamond Clear VOX. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureCure Emulsion. g. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 15 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 h. 1.,&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress& Seal W13. II i. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChcmRex; MasterKure-N-Seal VOC. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. k. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 0800. I. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation;Cure& Seal 200E. m. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Kure-N-Scal. n. Symons Corporation,a Dayton Superior Company;Cure& Seal 18 Percent E. o. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Clearseal WB STD. I p. . Unitex; Hydro Seal 18. q. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Radiance UV-25 r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 0800 . H. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type I, Class A. 1. Available Products: a. Burke by Edoco; Cureseal 1315. b. ChemMasters; Spray-Cure& Seal Plus. c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Sealcure 1315. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV). e. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Super Diamond Clear. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25. g. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal. h. 1.,&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus. i. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30. j. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 0. k. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Kure-N-Seal 5. 1. Tamms Industries, Inc.; LusterSeal 300. m. Unitex; Solvent Seal 1315. n. US Mix Products Company; US Spec CS-25 o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.;Certi-Vex AC 1315 I. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,Class A. -1. Available-Products: Ia. Burke by Edoco;Cureseal 1315 WB. b. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB. c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Sealcurc 1315 WB. d. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Super Diamond Clear VOX. e. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion. f. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal. g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. h. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30. i. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30. j. Symons Corporation,a Dayton Superior Company; Cure& Seal 31 Percent E. k. 'L'anims Industries, Inc.; l..usterSeal WB 300. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 16 WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 1. Unitex; Hydro Seal 25. m. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Radiance UV-25. n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315. 2.11 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM 0 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 1 C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881,two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements,and as follows: D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. F. Diamond Block-Outs: Diamond block-outs at columns for slab isolation, %2" 1IDPI material, color shall be `Dolphin Grey'. 1. Provide products by one of the following(no substitutions): a. King Plastics; Star Board 914-493-5502. b. Polymer Industries; Marine Board 801-363-3109. G. Freezer Rat-Slab Waterstop: Preformed plastic adhesive waterstop, or wet set waterstop for use at freezer rat-slabs. 1. Provide product byone of the p following(substitutions allowed): a. Synko-Flex Products; Synko-Flex Preformed Plastic Adhesive Waterstop. b. Synko-Flex Products; SF302 Synko-Flex Waterstop Preformed Joist Sealant. I 2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. I. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 17 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as I recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 13. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES,GENERAL. I A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data,or both,according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Workability: Concrete shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation,voids,or excessive bleeding. C. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than I portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: I a. Minimum of 15 percent to a maximum of 25 percent of the total cementitious for building footings and foundation walls. b. Minimum of 15 percent to a maximum of 25 percent of the total cementitious for site pavin c. Do not use fly ash in interior concrete slab on ground and suspended slabs unless required for mitigation of alkali reactive materials as required by geotechnical report. 111 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 25 percent maximum 3. Cementitious Materials Content (Portland Cement + Supplementary Cementitious Materals: Use 520 pounds minimum for all interior slab mixes. 1 1). Air-Entrained Admixture: Do not air-entrain interior slabs on ground and suspended concrete slabs. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 18 II WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 I r; Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete t0 0.06 pel'Cellt. by weight of cement. 1 F. Slump: Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed the limits indicated in the Concrete Mixtures for Building Elements section subject to the requirements that concrete shall be of a 1 consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, voids, or excessive bleeding. Maximum slump variances shall be as indicated in the Concrete Mixtures for Building Elements section. IG. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. Do not use Type F or G for slabs-on-ground or elevated slabs. 2. Water-reducing admixtures may be added to improve workability beyond 2 inches to 3 inches initial water slump. Mix shall have adequate water to produce consistent plastic material properties. 3. Concrete slabs shall only contain one water-reducing admixture. 4. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,or other adverse placement conditions. I 5. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. III6. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. II2.14CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings and Site Concrete: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi(24.1 MPa)at 28 days. 2. Maxinuum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) plus or minus 1", or a maximum of 8 inches(200 mm) I plus 0"or minus 2-1/2" for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) plus or minus 1" before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture(25 mm). 1 13. Foundation Wails: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa)at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) plus or minus 1.", or a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) plus 0"or minus 2-1/2" for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) I plus or minus 1" before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture(25 mm). 4. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2"(38- 1 mm)nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Slabs-on-Ground and Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi(27.6 MPa)at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu.yd. (309 kg/cu. m). IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 19 I WiNCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 3. Maximum Water-Ccmentitious Materials Ratio: 0.53. I. 4. Slump Limit: 6 inches (100 mm) maximum plus zero inches or minus 2-1/2" (38 mm), or 8 inches maximum (200 mm) plus zero inches minus 2-1/2" for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) plus or minus 1" before adding water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture. 5. Air Content: a. Interior slab on ground and suspended concrete slabs shall be"Non Air Entrained", with 3% maximum air present at time of placement. b. 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for exterior slabs with 1-1/2"(38-mm)nominal maximum aggregate size. I 2.15 FAI3RICATING REINFORCEMENT I A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." I 2.16 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M-13a and ASTM C 11 1 6,and furnish batch ticket information. B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M-13a. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 1 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu.yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu.yd. (0.76 cu. nt). 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. 2.17 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS I A. Except where indicated on the drawings, post-installed anchors shall consist of the following anchor types as provided by I...Iilti, Inc. II 1. Threaded rod to cracked or un-cracked Concrete: a. Hilti HIT-HY 200 Safe Set System with 1-lilti 1-llT-Z Rod per ICC ESR-3187. 2. Reinforcing Bar to cracked and un-cracked Concrete: a. Hilti 1-11T-HY 200 Safe Set System with Hilti Hollow Drill Bit System with II continuously deformed reinforcing bar per ICC ESR-3187. I I WINCO ST'ORi3,NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-20 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 0I/15 IPART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 AGGREGATE BASE PLACEMENT I A. Aggregate Base Fine Grading: 1. Level off aggregate base top surface with aggregate choker material as necessary as follows: a. To reduce surface friction and to meet specified fine grade tolerances specified I below. b. Where aggregate base material does not have sufficient fine particles to produce a surface that is free of exposed aggregate or surface voids greater than 3/8 inch in U size at time of slab installation. 2. Use laser guided equipment to establish specified base elevation. 3. Provide dry, smooth, flat, dense surface. 'fake corrective action if rutting or pumping is I evident during the preparation of the soil support system. 4. Proof-roll 48 hours maximum prior to concrete placement. Depression under a fully loaded concrete truck shall not exceed 1/2 inch. I 13. Slab-On-Grade Aggregate Base Fine Grade Tolerance: 4-0 inch, -3/4 inch with transition no greater than 3/4 inch vertically to 8 inches horizontally for level slabs. I3.2 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to AC! 301, to support vertical, II lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. I B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. IIC. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual,as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch(13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces. ID. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. RE. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to I vertical. II. Install keyways, reglets, recesses,and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. IWINCO STORL,NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-1N-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-21 LLC 1 W INC.C) FODS, �1.,C.( I/15 G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. 11. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 1. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris,just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and I maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written I instructions,before placing reinforcement. 3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.4 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork-for sides of beams,walls,columns, and-similar-parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits,joists,slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 75 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. I B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent:. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 22 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. I3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches(150 mm)and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. B. Granular Course: Place vapor retarder cover granular fill moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch(0 mm)or minus 3/4 inch(19 mm). 111 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. 1 C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. I. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS 1)1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. I. Place joints perpendicular- to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 1)o not continue reinforcement through I 2. sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-23 t WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset I joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, andii girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners,and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing I each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. I D. Saw-cut Control Joint Dust Collection: 1. Connect a dust collection system directly to each Soff-Cut saw being used. I 2. Dust Collection System: a. ProVac Dust Collection System by GladTech, Inc.,Nashville,TN (614)251-8111. b. SoffVac by Soff-Cut International, Inc. E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filer strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations,as indicated. II 1, Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 1 2. Terminatefull-widthjoint-filler strips not less than 1/2 iat h-(-13-mm)-or-more than I inch _- (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. F. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate I or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. G. Slab-On-Grade and Pavement Dowels: I 1. Secure dowels and sleeves (if required) perpendicular to joint and parallel to finished concrete surfaces. 2. Use prefabricated dowel supports at ends of dowels to maintain alignment, if necessary. 3. Dowel alignment shall be within specified tolerances. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-24 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 4. Dowels shall be manufactured to provide bond brake between steel and concrete. 5. Install dowels at construction joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I 6. Install slab-on-grade plate dowels within +/- 1/8 inch in dowel alignment in vertical and horizontal planes. 7. Install slab-on-grade plate dowels horizontally on the bulkhead at the greater depth of either mid-slab or 2-1/4 inch from slab surface to center line of the plate. III 3.8 CONVEYING I A. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable and in manner which will assure obtaining specified quality of concrete. IB. Re-tempering: Discard concrete which has already begun to set. Don not re-temper with water. I C. Equipment: Provide mixing and conveying equipment of proper size and design to ensure a. continuous flow of concrete to deliveiy end. Do not use aluminum pipe or equipment in contact with concrete. 1. Mixers, agitators and non-agitating units: Conform to ASTM C 94 and current certification requirements of Department of Transportation in state where concrete plant is located. 2. Belt Conveyers: I a. Use only types which will not cause segregation. b. Discharge runs over 30 feet in hopper. 3. Chutes: Metal or metal lined not to be installed at slopes greater than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. 4. Runways: a. Provide runways or other means above finished concrete level for wheeled conveying equipment. I b. Do not support runways on reinforcing. c. Do not wheel equipment directly over reinforcing or metal deck. S. Pumps: I a. Use pump hoses and other slickline components with 5 inch minimum inside diameter. b. For slickline reducers, reduction iii diameter shall not exceed 1 inch over 5 foot Ilength. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT' III A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. IB. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or placement unless approved by Architect. 1. One slump adjustment by adding water at the site shall be permitted upon concrete I deliveiy and shall be performed by the concrete supplier or a direct representative of the concrete supplier. The maximum water/cement ratio shall not be exceeded, and the concrete shall be discharged within 1-1/2 hours after the introduction of additional water. 1 C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-25 I Il WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 lases If a section cannot be continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 11 weakness.s. placedY Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures I and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into,lower'layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement ofa panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked I around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Follow requirements of ACI 302.1R as required to meet the minimum Levelness, F(L) requirements. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Follow finishing requirements of ACI 302.1 R as required to meet the minimum Flatness, F(F) requirements. 6. Use internal vibrator for formed elements, not form vibrators. 7. Slabs: a. Consolidate and screed concrete slabs-on-ground to allow construction joint pattern as indicated on Structural Drawings and as specified. Consolidate concrete by vibrating laser screeds. Other vibratory screeding methods are acceptable only in areas where laser screed is not accessible. I 1) Check laser screed level head a minimum of 3 times during each pour. Use feeler gauge to measure deviations. If deviations are present, replace head with a new straight one. b. Use internal vibration along construction joint at both formed and slab abutments. V ibi ate under plate dowels-.- Mark forms before—concreting to properly locate - dowels after concreting. c. Do not use crate tampers,jitterbugs,or mesh rollers. 3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES I A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified 11 limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-26 i IWINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and i defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. I I. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces I adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent: unformed surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. i 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS I A. General I. Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. I 2. 3. Do not add water to any slab surface during finishing operations. Do not add cement to any slab surface during finishing operations. 4. Perform no finishing operation while water is present on slab surface. IB. Initial Leveling: I. Complete bull floating, darbying and straight-edging before any bleed water is present on I slab surface. 2. Use a checkrod or highway straightedge 10 feet wide minimum for initial and later leveling instead of bull float where overall floor tolerances specified greater than F(F)20 /F(L) 15. IC. Hand and Power Floating: 1. Do not start floating until following conditions are met: i a. Bleeding is complete and water is gone, including water sheen on slab surface. b. Concrete will sustain the weight of finishers without cracking more than 1/8 to 1/4 inch indentations. I c. Mortar is not thrown by rotating blades of power float. 2. The finisher shall determine the proper time to start finishing procedures for interior slab placements on the basis of the above conditions. It is noted for advisory purposes, however, that typical setting characteristics of concrete materials will allow for initial I power floating to begin 3-1/2 hours-i-/- 1 hour after initial strike-off(screeding), at which time the concrete should support a finisher on foot without more than approximately a 1/4 inch indentation in the slab surface. Variations in concrete materials, nature and I proportion of supplementary cementing materials, and concrete temperature will cause setting behavior to vary. 3. Do not use following tools for floating: I a. Power troweling machines with trowel blades. b. Fresno or other type of wide metal trowel. c. Power floating machine with water attachment for wetting concrete. 4. Float three times minimum with each floating at right angles to previous floating, and Ifinal pass at 45 degrees to previous pass. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-27 i WINCO FOODS 1.1.C. 01/15 D. Troweling for Interior Slabs: 1. 1-land or power float floor before starting troweling. 2. For first troweling, keep blade as flat as possible and use low speed, minimizing "washboard"or"chatter marks"and"pitting". 3. Trowel two times minimum with first two trowelings at right angles. Cease troweling before blades scratch surface. 4. Allow time between trowelings for concrete to stiffen and water sheen to disappear. 5. Do not add water to slab surface during troweling. 6. Do not ride trowels on existing hardened concrete slabs. 'Trowels shall be carried off of slab surfaces. When parking power trowels on fresh concrete,place on top of plywood or spray area with evaporation retarder before placing trowel on top of slab. 7. Provide dense, smooth trowel surface, uniform in texture. Refer to approved permanent test panel. 8. Finish surface to produce maximum sheen free of scratches and trowel marks. E. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull- floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 Finch (6 mm) in I direction. I. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes. F. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing,built-up or membrane roofing,or sand-bed terrazzo. G. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Sales Floor: Apply a burnished hard trowel finish. 2. All Other Concrete Slabs-On-Ground and Suspended Slabs: Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 3. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. The minimum local area shall be bound on each side by columns lines. b. Slabs on ground: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F)35; and of levelness, F(L)25;with minimum local values of flatness, F(F)24;and of levelness, F(1.,) 17. c. Suspended slabs: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F)25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F)20. FL Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-28 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. I 1. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. I 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. I13. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping stri yin forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. I D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed,tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces. 3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACJ 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing. 13. Protect all concrete slabs from damage,wear and tear due to construction activities. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x 11 (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after I loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. E. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. F. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-29 WINCO FOODS, 1..1.,C 01/15 I W 1. Moisture Curing: Keepsurfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the I following materials: a. Water. U b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete I surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped I at least 12 inches(300 mm),and scaled by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover • material and waterproof tape. I a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. I b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with I bonding of floor covering used on Project.. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller 111according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a I continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity I of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS I A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. I 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitanee, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 14 days'old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 111 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 30 WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 3.15 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until ' construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact ' faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of_joint after hardening. 3.16 PROTECTION ION A. Slab Protection: 1. Protect slabs from staining prior to application of densifier. 2. Protect finished floor to prevent damage including staining, gouges and scratching by construction traffic and activities until Owner possession. a. Barricade concrete surfaces immediately after placing and finishing. b. 2,500psi: Foot traffic permitted. No construction materials in contact with slab surface. c. 3,000psi: Scissor lift traffic permitted. d. Heavy traffic permitted after concrete has obtained, by test, its design strength as noted on Drawings. 3. Keep slabs free from dirt and grime. 4. Provide impact protection to slab with approved sheet materials. Remove or consolidate ' impact protection materials on a regular basis to prevent discoloring. The use of plastic sheets for impact protection is prohibited. 5. Prohibit foot traffic by workers and other not involved in floor construction or finishing ' 6. operations in areas where floor construction or finishing operations are being performed. Vehicles and equipment may be driven on concrete surface within building line only if the slab is protected by the following: a. Diaper hydraulically-powered equipment. b. Place non-absorbent drop cloths or other breathable slab protection that will not stain slab surface under parked vehicles. c. Vehicles and equipment are equipped with non-marking tires. ' d. Tire treads are inspected for debris prior to use on slab and at least once per day. Remove embedded items which may cause damage to floor slab. 7. Clean up spills on slab immediately. Provide cleaning chemicals and absorptive ' 8. materials. Storage of structural steel or metal fabrications is prohibited on concrete surface within building line. 9. Adequately protect concrete inserts and other embedded items from movement, mechanical injury,or from damage by elements. ' WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-31 1 WINCO FOODS, I...,1_,C 01/15 10. Provide access ramps of compacted earth or other means along exposed concrete edges of floor slabs to prevent equipment and machinery from impacting edges, Barricade other exposed edges to vehicular traffic which may damage edges. ' 13. Concrete Floor Protection Plan: Develop Concrete Floor Protection Plan that addresses the following procedures: 1, Communication of protection plan to subcontractors and vendors, including those directly contracted by the Owner. 2. Procedures for compliance with slab protection requirements specified in the Section. 3. When and how floor covering protection will be provided in high traffic areas. 4. Condition, inspection, and operational procedures for construction equipment allowed on the slab surface. 5. Procedures for cleaning up slab spills, including use of and availability of cleaning chemicals and absorptive materials at Site. C. Submit Concrete Floor Protection Plan. Comply with the requirements of approved Concrete Floor Protection Plan. 3.17 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. I 13. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and ' stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs.secured in Mace with-bonding agent 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and ' verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) , CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-32 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or ' that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width,and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. ' 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent:floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out. low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to ' manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original ' concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes I inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to ' match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.18 POST INSTALLED ADHESIVE ANCHORS ' A. Anchor capacity used in design shall be based on the technical data published by the manufacturer. Substitution requests for alternative products must be approved in writing by the Structural Engineer of Record prior to use. Substitutions will be evaluated by their perspective ' ICC ESR showing compliance with the relevant building code for seismic uses, load resistance, installation category, and availability of comprehensive installation instructions. Adhesive anchor evaluation will also consider creep, in-service temperature and installation temperature. ' B. Install anchors per the manufacturer instructions. C. Overhead adhesive anchors must be installed using the I iilit Profi System 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-1N-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-33 1 < DS LLC 01/15 I WINCO FOODS,, D. The contractor shall arrange an anchor manufacturer's representative to provide Onsite I installation training for all of their anchoring products specified. The Structural Engineer of Record must receive documented confirmation that all of the contractor's personnel who install I anchors are trained prior to the commencement of installing anchors. E. Anchor capacity is dependent.upon spacing between adjacent anchors and proximity of anchors to edge of concrete. install anchors in accordance with spacing and edge clearances indicated I on the drawings. F. Existing Reinforcing bars in the concrete structure may conflict with specified anchor locations. I Unless noted otherwise, the contractor shall review existing structural drawings and shall undertake to locate the position of the reinforcing bars at the locations of the concrete anchors in order to not cut the existing reinforcing. I 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. i3, Failure to detect defective material or Work will neither prevent rejection when defects are 1 discovered later nor will it obligate Owner to make final acceptance. C. Preinstallation Conference: The Owner hired T&l agency shall conduct the preinstallation I conference at the Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section Quality . Requirements and this specification section, 1.5 Quality Assurance and this section 3.16, Field Quality Control. I 1. Before installation of slab on ground, review concrete placement procedure for ensuring quality of concrete installation. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned I with cast-in-place concrete on ground to attend, including the following: a. General Contractor's superintendent or Project Manager. b. Owner's Representative. c. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. I d. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. -Concrete-subcontractor. f. Architect of Record and Structural Engineer if requested by owner. 2. Comment on Quality Control Check List under Paragraph 3.17 if required by Owner or I contractor representative. D. Inspections: I 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. I 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. I 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Post installed anchors. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-34 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 II . Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according b to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: II. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu.yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for Ieach additional 50 cu.yd. (38 cu. m)or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly 1 selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M;one test at point of placement for each composite sample, I but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for 1 each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M;one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test I for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 3I M. I a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 1 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. 'rest one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens I at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. I7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures I for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and 00 compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive- ' strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and I materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. 10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of I concrete. 11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACI CONCRETE 033000-35 I WINCC)FOODS, LLC 01/15 1 requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency 1 may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 12. Additional testing and inspecting,at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply I with the Contract Documents. F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) 1 within 48 hours of finishing. 3.20 NON CONORMING WORK I A. Remove and replace concrete related work which does not conform to specified requirements including strength,tolerances and finishes. 13. Costs for corrective work, remedies for out-of-tolerance work, and extra testing as required by defective work shall be borne by Contractor. I 3.21 PREINSTALLATION CHECK LIST A, Batch PIant I 1. Concrete Supplier certified in accordance with NRMCA Certification of Ready Mixed concrete Production Facilities. 13. Concrete Trucks 1. Sampling shall occur after discharge of approximately 15%and 85%of the load and shall be obtained within an elapsed time of 15 minutes, maximum per ASTM C 94/C 94M- 13 a. 2. Only Contractor can reject concrete. Special Inspector shall inform contractor of failed tests as soon as they are recorded. Contractor shall be present during tests and facilitate I timely communication with parties involved. 3. Verify approved mix design is shown on batch ticket. 4. Verify truck ticket clearly indicates information necessary to calculate the total mixing I water. Total mixing water includes free water on aggregates, batch water (metered or weighed) including ice batched at-the plant, wash waterfetained-h the nixing-drumand - water added by the truck operator from the mixer tank,and what admixtures can be added in the field. If none is indicated,no additions will be allowed. I 5. Verify truck has mixed the approved amount of revolutions as submitted per paragraph 1.413.3.b.1. The truck drum shall be equipped with a counting gauge to confirm revolutions from the batch plant. I 6. Project site mixing: 1.5 min. for first cubic yard in drum plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard(10 cubic yard batch =3.75 min. of on-site mixing) C. Vapor Retarder Installation 1 1. Approved Supplier 2. Laps are adhered or taped 3. Granular fill meets specification I 4. Punctures are repaired WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-36 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 1 D. Reinforcing Steel Installation Contractor to coordinate with Special Inspector the required inspection time. Include I 2. sufficient time for inspections,repairs, corrections,etc. prior to concrete placement. Record agreed upon time line and schedule. ' E. Slab on Ground Placement 1. Slump: no more than 6"max plus zero inches, minus 2-1/2". 2. Air Content: per above specifications(no more than 3%for interior trowel finish floors) 3. Concrete Temperature: 95 degree F max. 4. Review and Highlight ACI hot and cold weather procedures F. Concrete Finishes and Finishing 1. Copy of ACI Wallet Cards for all Certified Flatwork Technicians and Finishers to be kept on file in the job trailer. 1 G. Curing Procedures I. Curing manufacturer application rates and recommendations. H. Construction,Contraction,and Isolation Joints l. Plate or bar dowel placement per manufacturer's requirements and recommendations 1. Floor Flatness and Levelness ' l. Test each placement prior r to stat of next placement 2. Must meet the minimum flatness as stated in this Specification section, paragraph 3.11.G.3 I 1 1 1 1 ' WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-37 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 Coarse& Fine A re rate Gradation Information I % Passing Each Sieve (All Sieve Sizes must be entered) Combined% Retained Sieve Combined Size Coarse Coarse Coarse Fine Fine % PassingCumulative Individual Agg.#1 Agg. #2 Agg. #3 Agg.#1. Agg. #2 I 1-1/2" ___..__.....___ _.. _ 1" 3/4" -- 1/2" ___ ----_.._—___-- _._.— II #8 I #16 #30 #50 I#10a #200 I %of vol. I Aggregate Ratios CQlllbinled%cumulative retained 3/8"sieve Coarseness Factor = = Combined %cumulative retained#8 sieve I Workability Factor = Combined % passing#8 sieve = Adj-Workability Factor _._ WF+ Cementitious Material—564 /37.61 = Allowable Adj-WF = Adj-WF= [(11.25 - .15 Cr')+361 +/-2.5 = Low High I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-38 I r WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 I SUBMITTAL SUBMIT TO IConcrete Finishing Subcontractor's Qualification Statement Architect • 3 AC[ Finisher Certification IConcrete Batch Plant Certification • NRMCA Certification Architect I . DOT Certification Architect Sieve Analysis for Aggregate Base System Structural Engineer • Aggregate Base Material Geotechnical Engineer 1 • Choker Material Testing Agency _____......_.-.+_ AI'CIIIIeCt I Mix Design Structural Engineer • One mix for all interior slabs Testing Agency Owner's Construction Manager I Attachments to Concrete Mix Design • Mill test reports • Concrete aggregate designation,type,quality, &source Architect • • Sieve analysis for concrete aggregate Structural Engineer • Concrete aggregate Supplier Statement Testing Agency • Product date for concrete admixtures Owner's Construction Manager I .I Concrete compressive strength data • Chloride-Ion content • Time of initial setting Ar I T"V echnct Concrete Supplier Approval 'Testing Agency Architect Slab Reinforcing Bar Shop Drawings Structural Engineer I • Installation details Testing Agency Product Data I • Dowels at construction joints Architect • Dowels at sawed joints Structural Engineer • Vapor retarder Testing Agency • Curing compound Architect Slab Joint and Placement Plan Structural Engineer IPre-slab Installation Meeting _—....... ..._._ • Record of notification 'Testing Agency I . Meeting agenda Owner's Construction Manager I • Meeting minutes Concrete Floor Protection Plan Owner's Construction Manager _ .._.........._._-- _. _ _.__. I Delivery'Pickets Testing Agency IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-39 111 WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/15 Coarseness Factor Chart I 115 : ilii iz I f�,� 1 {} F 1. 4 1" ,..:„.iii t:. 30111 03 PriP-. 4 4 D 1r�1t; r��,rx{u{fi I mil1 1111111111 1 100 80 60 it 0 20 0 COARSENESS FACTOR., % 111 • Zone 1 —This zone represents a coarse gap-graded aggregate with a deficiency in intermediate particles (passing the 0.4 inch sieve and nominally retained on the No. 8 sieve). The aggregate with a gradation in this zone has a high potential for segregation during concrete placemnt. I Zone 11—This is the optimum zone for concrete mixtures with nominal maximum size from 1-1/2 inch through 3/4 inch. ® Zone 111— This is an extension of the Zone II mix for finer mixtures with nominal maximum size I less than 3/4 inch. ® Zone IV—Concrete mixtures in this zone generally contain excessive fines,with high potential for segregation during consolidating and finishing. I ® Zone V---This is a mixture with too much coarse aggregate,which makes the concrete unworkable. • The unlabeled zone on top of Zone V is referred to as the trend bar. It is the transition zone between Zone V and the other zones on top of the trend bar. I ENI) OF SECTION 033000 I I I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-40 I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 SECTION 033300-ARCI-IITECT'URAL CONCRETE(POLISHED GRAY CONCRETE SLAB) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATEI) DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions ' and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in-place architectural concrete including form facings, reinforcement ' accessories, concrete materials, concrete mixture design, placement procedures, and polished concrete finishes. 13. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for formwork; material, fabrication, and installation requirements for steel reinforcement;and field quality control. ' 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants in contraction and other joints in cast-in-place architectural concrete. 111 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete Slab: Formed "Gray" polished concrete slab that requires special concrete materials, formwork, placement, or finishes to obtain specified architectural appearance. B. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results,or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: I. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity. D. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturer: WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300- I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 I. Cementitious materials. I 2. Admixtures. 3. Curing compounds. 4. Moor and slab finish grinding and polishing process. 5. Bonding agents. 6. Adhesives. I 7. Semi-rigid joint fillers. 8, Joint filler strip. E. Concrete Polishing Manufacturer's Certification stating that the certified Certi-Shine installer is for I this specific project. Submit approval letter on Vexcon Chemicals letterhead stating that the applicator is approved for this specific WinCo store. F. Field Quality Control Test and Inspection reports. I G. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Polished Concrete Flatwork Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on the project, personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. I B. Certified Certi-Shine Applicator Qualifications: 1. All certified Certi-Shine applicators shall provide an adequate crew and the proper materials I and equipment to perform the work within the time allotted as outlined in Section 3.5D for the grinding,densifying and polishing of interior concrete floor slabs within the Contractor's I Project Schedule. 2. All certified "Corti-Shine" applicators shall become familiar with the requirements and methods specified in this section for the proper performance of the work. 3. All certified "Certi-Shine" applicators shall have a minimum of (5) years polishing/grinding I experience of similar size projects to be considered for WinCo work. 4. Contractor shall contact the concrete polishing manufacturer to obtain a list of approved "Certi-Shine" applicators for each project. it is the contractor's responsibility to contact "Corti-Shine" for each project as certified applicators may change. Prior to starting Certi- Shine installation,each Certi-Shine applicators shalt stiNnit to the ,._froiu Vexcon Chemicals stating that they are an approved Certi-Shine applicator. a. Contact; "Certi-Shine"Manufacturer: I) Vexcon Chemicals I Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Jennifer Faller 888-839-2661 1 C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300-2 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 D. Source Limitations for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Obtain each color, size, type, and variety of concrete material and concrete mixture from one manufacturer with resources to provide ' cast-in-place architectural concrete of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. E. AC1 Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract ' Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete, "Sections 1 through 5 and Section 6, "Architectural Concrete." 1 2. ACI 303.1, "Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete." E. Concrete Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests. Reference to Specification Section 033000, Cast-In-Place Concrete, for slab testing. G. Mockups: Before casting architectural concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,texture,tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size (nein. 400 s.f./20-feet by 20-feet) as directed by WinCo Construction Manager. ' 2. Notify WinCo Construction Manager a minimum of(7) days prior to date and time when mockup will be prepared. 3. Demonstrate curing, cleaning, and protecting of cast-in-place architectural concrete, ' finishes,and contraction joints, as applicable. 4. In presence of Construction Manager, damage part of the exposed-face surface for each finish, and texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair surface blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces. 5. Obtain Construction Manager's approval of mockups before pouring architectural concrete. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed work. Approved mockups may become part of the completed work if acceptable to WinCo Construction Manager. H. Preinstallation Conference: Contractor shall conduct conference at Project site to comply with ' requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of polished concrete materials to include floor treatment application, degree of polish, concrete finish specifications, floor flatness and levelness, etc. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place architectural concrete to attend, including the following: a. WinCo Construction Manager b. Contractor's superintendent. c. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete testing. d. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. e. Concrete flatwork subcontractor. Certified"Certi-Shine"Applicator 2. Review concrete finishes and finishing, cold-and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction joints, concrete repair procedures, and protection of polished concrete slabs. WINCO STORE NO, 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300-3 I WINC() FOODS, l..,I,C 04/14 I. Warranty: I. Manufactures Standard(10)year Warranty from Grand Opening date. I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES I A. General; Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for steel reinforcement and other requirements for reinforcement accessories. I 2.2 GRAY CONCRETE E MATT RIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, andIII source,throughout Project called out on drawings as Polished Gray Concrete: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I/II, 100% Gray. I B. Normal-Weight Course Aggregate: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide 100% local aggregate from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years I satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm). I 2, Gradation: Uniformly graded. C. Normal-Weight Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33,manufactured or natural 100%standard local sand. I D. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M except flee of wash water from mixer washout operations. 2.3 ADMIXTURES I A. -Chemical Admixtures; Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted-ii hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. I 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. Admixture must be approved by Store Engineer and Architect. I 2.4 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING PRODUCTS I A. Pre-treat: 1. PSI Pre-Treat manufactured by Polymer Sales International, Inc., Burley, Idaho, 208-954- 6247, Alan Palmer. This product shall be used for both wet cured and chemical cured floors. (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) B. Hardener/Sealing Agent: I WINC() STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300-4 I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 II. "Certi-Shine Clear" manufactured by Vexcon Chemicals, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 888- 839-2661,Jennifer Faller. (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) IC. Joint Fillers: I 1. Semi-rigid, 2 component, self leveling, fast curing, polyurea joint filler with shore A80 or higher hardness. Color: Gray. D. Finish (Polish Level); I1. 400 Polish Level. IF. Polishing System Quality Control: 1. All products shall be manufactured by system manufacturer or be approved (in writing) for Iuse by system manufacturer. F. Waxing System: I 1. Cleaner, "LF-150" by Suttee, Inc., 1880 N MacArthur Dr., Tracy, California, 208-820-3700 installed by Delta CIeaning Services, 23 Maxwell St., Suite [3, Lodi, California, 209-339- 4200. (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) I 2. Wax, "Insta Guard" by Suttee, Inc., 1880 N MacArthur Dr., Tracy, California, 209-820- 3700 installed by Delta Cleaning Services, 23 Maxwell St., Suite B, Lodi, California, 209- 339-4200. (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) 1 2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES (GRAY POLISI-LED CONCRETE SLABS) I A. Prepare design mixtures for the type and strength of cast-in-place Gray polished concrete slabs proportioned on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data,or both,according to ACI 301. I 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed design mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures, 13. Proportion concrete mixtures as follows: I 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa). 2. Minimum Cement Content: 520 lbs/c.y.(309 kg/c.m.) II3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches(1 00 mm)or 8 inches(200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 I to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm). S. Air Content: Gray polished concrete slabs shall be"Non Air Entrained". IC. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement. I D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved by Construction Manager and Architect prior to use. 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCH ITECI'URAL CONCRETE 033300-5 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 2.6 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed or Site-Mixed Gray Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2.7 CONCRETE CHEMICAL CURING COMPOUND 111 A. Chemical curing compound shall be 4CERTI-VIXENV10 CURE 100' manufactured by "Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.", 888-839-2661. (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) 2.8 HDPE DIAMOND I3LOCKOUTS AT COLUMNS I A. See Specification Section 033000, Cast-In-Place Concrete, Paragraph 2.10-F for product description and manufacturer. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 111 3.1 FORM WORK A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for formwork, embedded items, and shoring and reshoring. 3.2 REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for fabricating and installing steel reinforcement. Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against shifting during concrete placement. 13. -Set wire ties with ends-directed into concrete, not toward exposed-concrete surfaces. 3.3 JOINTS I A. Construction Joints: Install construction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not111 impaired,at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Align construction,joint within rustications attached to form- facing material. 3. Locate joints for slabs, as shown on drawings. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300 -6 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 13. Control Joints: Form weakened-plane control•joints true to line with faces er endicular to p p surface plane of cast-in-place white concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at I locations indicated on drawings. 3.4 CONCRETEPLACIMLNT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, form-release agent, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 1 III:3. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of AC! 301. 1 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. IC. Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 303.1. D. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from I physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on I frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt,or other materials containing antifreeze agents. 4. Do not use chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design Imixtures. E. Ilot-Weather Placement: Comply with AC! 301 and as follows: II. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete Iis Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. IF. See Specification Section 033000, Cast-In-Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.9, Finishing Floors & • Slabs,for flatness and levelness requirements. 1 0. Concrete shall be chemically cured (7) seven days. See Section 3.51) for installation and curing process. See Paragraph 2.7 for curing compound. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300- 7 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 3.5 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH A. Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog I installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and manufacturer's data sheets. 1. Deliver materials in original containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand name and directions for storage. 2. Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed containers. Maintain record of container numbers. 13. Examination: 1. Certified "Corti-Shine" Applicator and Contractor's Superintendent shall inspect and verify that concrete substrate conditions,which have been previously installed under other sections or contracts, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to installation of concrete finishing materials. I 2. Verify the concrete has been chemically cured. (RE: See Editor Note at Paragraph 3.4 G.) 3, Verify concrete surfaces received a hard steel-trowel finish during placement. C, Preparation: I 1. Ensure surfaces are clean and free of dirt and other foreign matter harmful to performance of concrete finishing materials. 2. Examine surface to determine soundness of concrete for polishing. 3. Contractor shall remove surface contamination. 4. Contractor shall correct deficiencies to slab substrate before Applicator proceeds with Certi- Shine I Installation. 5. After the Certified Certi-Shine Applicator has accepted the concrete slab, it shall be their sole responsibility for installation of the finish system as specified. D. Chemical Cure installation with Time Line: I 1. Pre-Treatment: for Newly poured concrete. a. (First Day) As soon as possible after final troweling, sawcut the control joints. Extreme caution shall be taken to minimize airborne dust. The concrete cutting I contractor shall remove excess dust. No lacquers or chalk protectants shall be used. rt. —(1i y) PSI Pre-"Treat at 200 s.f. per gallon—on—freshly freshly poured-concrete, immediately after the surface water has dissipated. Pre-Treat should remain wet for a minimum of45 minutes and should be left to dry(without puddling). I c. (First Day) After the pretreat is completed,the entire floor shall be chemically cured at the manufacturer's recommended rate of 300-400 s.f per gallon. 2. Curing Cycle: I a. (Second-Seventh Day) Do to the Chemical Curing Compound,no work required. 3. Surface Preparation: a. (Eighth Day) Wet grind the entire floor with 100 grit diamonds iii a North to South 1 progressive motion and then in an East to West progressive motion. b. (Eighth Day) Wet grind the entire floor with 200 grit diamonds in an East to West progressive motion and then in a North to South progressive motion. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300- 8 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 c. (Eighth Day) Scrub the floor to ensure that the floor is clean, with smooth transitions and uniform appearance. Verify that the concrete is able to absorb water. 4. (Eighth Day) Provide polished concrete floor treatment in its entirety of slab area indicated on drawings. Apply Certi-Vex Clear at 200 s.f. per gallon with continuous movement for one hour minimum as recommended by Floor Finish Manufacturer. 5. (Eighth Day) Recoat floor where suction spots or unsealed areas occur to insure ' densification to rejection, Apply additional spiff coat application if required by floor finish manufacturer, Allow to dry overnight. 6. (Ninth Day) Burnish with a high speed burnisher 2,000 rpm minimum using a Hogs Hair or natural equivalent to heat the floor 20 degrees above beginning floor temperature. 7. (Ninth Day) Diamond polish concrete floor surfaces with 400 grit diamonds and a true- 111 planetary polishing machine as recommended by Floor Finish Manufacturer. A minimum of 15,000 s.f shall be completed by the end of the ninth day. 8. (Tenth-Twelfth Days) Stagger work areas based on pours so that upon completing the first 15,000 s.f., that the second 15,000 s.f. is being polished and sealed. Continue with the staggering process so that the last section is completed on the twelfth day, thereby turning over the last section on the eve of the twelfth day. E. Adjustments: II. Polish to higher gloss those areas not meeting specified gloss levels per mock-up. 2. Fill Joints flush to surface. F. Floor Preparation Procedure: . Fill the Auto-Scrubber with a solution of Surtec LF-150 diluted at 3oz per gallon of water. (Auto fill with Surlec Blend Center where available) 2. Fill a mop bucket with a solution of Surtec, LF-1 50 Heavy Duty Cleaner diluted six gallons of water to one pint(16oz) Surtec LF-I50. ' 3. 4. Fill two mop buckets with COLD RINSE WATER. Using an Angle Broom sweep the edges and then dust mop the section of floor to be cleaned and sealed. 5. Apply a liberal amount of the cleaning solution to edges and around the roof supporting column, then using the Automatic Scrubber, apply the cleaning solution to the rest of the floor that is to be sealed, 6. Using the Automatic Scrubber scrub the floor in all directions, first north & south and then east&west. Be sure that all concrete slurry stains and soil is removed from the floor. 7. Pick up all of the cleaning solution with the auto scrubber. Pay special attention to the edges because cleaning solution may have dried on the floor. I 8. 9. Damp mop rinse the floor and allow the floor to dry. Fans can be used to expedite drying. After the floor has dried to the touch, buff the floor with a propane powered floor buffer. This will help to dehydrate the floor and remove any cleaning solution residue. 10. Dust mop the floor to remove any dust, 111 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRITE 033300-9 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 G. Waxing- Surtec"INSTA GUARD" I New Store Prep& Sealing Instructions: VERY IMPORTANT!! Construction debris such as concrete & sheetrock dust, sand & dirt will damage the floor more than customer traffic. It is highly recommended that at a minimum the heavy traffic areas of the floor should be dust mopped and auto-scrubbed at least 2-3 times per day I and no less than once per day. These instructions were written with assumption the floor has been polished to 400 grit and has , been has been highly densified. I Before starting work each day, choose a section of the floor that you will have enough time to completely& properly perform the following steps during the time allotted. I As you progress through the store, each section that has been completed with the INSTA GUARD FINISH must be maintained daily with the DAILY MAINTENACE procedures noted at the end of these directions. 1. Initial prep before sealing: a. Dust-mop the floor and use a scraper to remove anything that is stuck to the floor. b. Fill the auto-scrubber with SURTEC LF-ISO Heavy Duty Cleaner from the DEEP SCRUB dispenser in the.janitor's room, and equip it with SURTEC BLUE SCRUB PADS. c. After deep scrubbing with LF-150, rinse the floor with clean water and allow it to dry. 2. Only If Necessary... I STAIN REMOVAL PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF "INSTA GUARD" - Remove all stains on the floor before the application of INSTA GUARD. NOTE: Depending on the size of the stain and the availability of equipment, a rotary floor 111 machine may be used in place of an auto-scrubber for stain removal. a. Place a set of four SURTEC #400 DIAMOND PUCKS on a RIGID BACKER and II place one RIGID BACKER on each PINK OR RID SCRUB PAD on the auto- scrubber or floor machine. b. Apply water to floor with a mop to lubricate the diamonds, and then with the squeegee up & the solution on, use the #400 DIAMOND PUCKS on the auto- -scrubber oi'floor machine to remove-'the stains from the floor. NOTE: if more aggressive stain removal is needed, follow-up by using-the #200 DIAMOND PUCKS in place of#400 DIAMOND PUCKS and repeat step 3 above. c. If#200 DIAMOND PUCKS were used to remove the stain, install #400 DIAMOND PUCKS on the auto-scrubber, apply water to floor with a mop to lubricate the diamonds, then with the squeegee up &the solution on, use the auto-scrubber or floor machine to achieve an appearance consistent with the rest of the floor— in most cases 2-3 slow passes. Pick up the water NOTE: After the floor is dry, inspect for an even appearance where the stain was 111 removed — if needed, repeat step (3) above until the desired even appearance has been achieved. I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300- 10 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 3. Preparing& sealing: (After stains have been removed from the un-guarded fl r. co ) a. 'T'horoughly dry propane buff the section of the floor that was stripped with a SURTEC #400 TOTAL IMPREGNATED PAI.)to achieve an even appearance on the floor-- in most cases 2-3 slow passes. b. Thoroughly dust-mop the floor. Scrub the floor with SURTEC PINK. CLEAN & PREP PADS using LF-150 at 2 oz. per gallon. Rinse the floor with clear water. Apply 2 thin even coats of SURTEC INSTA GUARD making sure the first coat is completely dry before applying the second coat. c. When the second coat of INSTA GUARD is completely dry, propane buff the entire area with a SURTEC WHITE POLY PAD and open to traffic. 4. Daily maintenance during construction: a. Dust mop the sales floor daily, and more often if possible,and use a scraper to remove I b. any stickers, gum,etc. Fill the auto-scrubber with SURTEC LF-150 Heavy Duty Cleaner from the "Daily Maintenance" dispenser in the janitor's room and equip it with SURTEC PINK CLEAN & PREP PADS. Auto-scrub the entire sales floor at least once daily and more often in the front and back entry and heavy traffic areas when possible. c. Propane buff the entire sales floors 2 times per week to keep floor finish tight and durable through out the course of the construction. 5. Stain &damage repair after sealing and the floor has been protected with "INSTA GUARD" If staining occurs on the INSTA GUARD during construction, it should be removed as soon ' as possible using the following step-by-step instructions: This Procedure is to be used when normal scrubbing and buffing will not remove the stain. a. Dust mop the area to be repaired& use a scraper to remove any stickers,gum,etc. b. Fill the auto-scrubber with SURTEC LF-150 Heavy Duty Cleaner, from the center "Deep Scrub" dispenser, as pictured below on left, in the janitor's room & equip it with SURTl:C BLUESCRUB PADS. Double scrub the area using the auto-scrubber. c. Place a set of four SURTEC #400 DIAMOND PUCKS on a RiGID BACKER and place one RIGID BACKER on each PINK OR RED SCRUB PAD on the auto- scrubber or floor machine d. Apply water to floor with a mop to lubricate the diamonds, then with the squeegee up, use the #400 DIAMOND PUCKS on the auto-scrubber or floor machine to remove the stains from the floor. NOTE: if more aggressive stain removal is needed, use #200 DIAMOND PUCKS in place of#400 DIAMOND PUCKS and repeat step 3 above with the#400 DIAMOND I e. PUCKS. If#200 DIAMOND PUCKS were used to remove the stain, install #400 DIAMOND PUCKS on the auto-scrubber, apply water to floor with a mop to lubricate the diamonds, then with the squeegee up& the solution on, use the auto scrubber or floor machine to achieve an appearance consistent with the rest of the floor•--in most cases 2-3 passes. Pick up the water NOTE: After the floor is dry, inspect for an even appearance where the stain was ' removed—if needed, repeat step 5 (above) until the desired even appearance has been achieved. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300- 11 I WINCO FOODS, I.-1.,C.04/14 f: 'ID BACKERS with the DIAMOND PUCKS from the auto-scrubber. I Using Pink or Red Scrub Pads, with the squeegee down, thoroughly auto-scrub the floor,overlapping beyond the area being repaired by about 2 feet. II gRemove the RIGID Propane buff the entire area that was scrubbed with a SURTEC #400 TOTAL IMPREGNATED DIAMOND PAD. b. Thoroughly dust-mop the floor and then apply one thin coat of SURTEC INSTA I GUARD on the area,feathering out the edges. i. Allow the INSTA GUARD to completely dry and then apply a second thin coat of INSTA GUARD overlapping beyond the first coat by about 12", again feathering out the edges. j. When the INSTA GUARD is completely dry, propane buff the entire area that was recoated with a SURTIC WHITE POLY PAD and open to traffic. NOTE: You can also find the above Stain Removal instructions on the Wall Chart I H. Protection: 1. Protect installed product from damage during remainder of construction. I. Polished Concrete System Acceptance: I 1. WinCo Construction Manager, Contractor and Certified "Certi-Shine" Applicator shall review and inspect polished concrete system application and execute the attached acceptance111 form. Contractor shall furnish the executed form as part of the closeout package. END OF SECTION 033300 I I. I I I I . I I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300- 12 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/14 POLISHED CONCRETE SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE FORM OWNER: WinCo Foods, I..,L,C ADDRESS: 650 N. Armstrong Place, Boise, Idaho 83704 tWINCO STORE NO. _------- --�or CYPI,and NAME of I3UIL,F3INC;:--- ADDRESS/LOCATION: _ (Intersection if applicable) CONTRACTOR: (Name) (Address) (Voice/Fax/E-mail) POLISHED CONCRETE APPLICATOR: (Name) (Address) (Voice/Fax/E-mail) DATE OF INSPECTION/ACCEPTANCE: COMMENTS: 1 ACCEPTANCE SIGNATURES: *WinCo Construction Manager Date *Contractor W Date *Polished Concrete Applicator Date *All signatures shall be executed and dated for final acceptance of the polished concrete system. **Submit this form with Closeout Documents as described in Specification Section 017000, Project Closeout. WINCO STORE NC). 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 033300- 13 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/15 I SECTION 055000- METAL FABRICATIONS I PART 1 -GENERAL. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal bollards. 2. Pipe guards. 13. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. 13. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 1.4ASSURANCE UALITY Q A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." I ' WINCO STORE;NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/15 1.5 PROJECT`� I N ' i CONDI I O S A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying I the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. I 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.6 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified I. in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS I A. _ Steel Plates, Shapes,and-Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel`Tubing: ASTM A 500,cold-formed steel tubing(HSS). I C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. I 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. 1 WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/15 • C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. I1. Use primer with a VOC content of 250 g/L(2.1 lb/gal.)or less. 2. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. ID. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. I 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 340 g/L(2.8 Ib/gal.)or less. 2. Available Products: a. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. b. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. c. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. I d. Sherwin-Williams Company(The);Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. e. 'Nemec Company, Inc.;Tneme-Zinc 90-97. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, Icomplying with SSPC-Paint 20. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. IG. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107,specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. II. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day Icompressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION,GENERAL I A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain I structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. I 13. Cut, drill,and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. IC. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. ID. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 3 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/15 I. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. U. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, 111and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. I. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. I 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to 1• complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise I indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers,and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. , 2.6 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES I A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. I B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. WiNCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) I METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-4 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/15 I2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES I A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. I 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL T TRIM IA. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. I13. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. Space at 24" o.c. Max. 1 C. Galvanize where indicated. I2.9 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch-(6.4-mm-)thick steel plate. 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive push-button controls for door operators, provide necessary cutouts for push-button controls and hole for wire. I1.3. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all 4 corners for 3/4-inch(19-mm)anchor bolts. 1 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards. IC. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-)thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches(200 mm)deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger than OD of bollard. ID. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch (6.4- mm) wall-thickness steel tubing with an OI) approximately 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less than ID of Ibollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4 inch (19 mm)steel machine bolt. 2.10 PIPE GUARDS I A. Fabricate pipe guards from 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick by 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch (50- I mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts. WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-5 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/15 B. Galvanize pipe g wards after fabrication. 2.11 FINISHES,GENERAL, 111 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed •I below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M,for galvanizing steel and iron products. I 13. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B)and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications,except those with I galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. I 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts,welds,and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 ---1NS3 AtLATION,GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing 111 metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb,true,and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after • fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I METAL FABRICATION 055000- 6 I 11 WINCO FOODS, LLC 04/15 I1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. I 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no I roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. IE. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry,or similar construction. 1 F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. I3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES I A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. I B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges,shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. Il. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 1 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. I3.3INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches(75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. ISupport and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. I 3.4 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS IA. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4- inch (19-mm) bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches (660 mm) Iabove driving surface. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 7 I WINCO FOODS,)ODS, LLC 04/15 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop 1 painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. 1 13. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 1 END OF SECTION 055000 I 111 I I I I I I I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 8 1. I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I SECTION 066400- PLASTIC PANELING I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass-fiber reinforced plastic(FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring for installing plastic paneling. 2. Division 10 Section "Wall and Door Protection" for corner guards installed over plastic paneling. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: L)o not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. I iWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) PLASTIC PANELING 066400- 1 i I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING II A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. Fire rated panels where called out on drawings. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I a. Crane Composites, Inc. b. Marlite. I 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm). 3. Surface Finish: Smooth, as indicated on drawings. 4. Color: White,as indicated on drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES I A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners,outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even I surface for panel installation. 13. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, -and-dust. C. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to I. manufacturer's written recommendations. 1). Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints at corners are not less than 12 inches (300 mm)wide. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I PLASTIC PANELING 066400-2 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/]3 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. 13. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories per manufacturer's instruction. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. ENI)OF SECTION 066400 I I I I I 1 I i I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) PI...AS'I'IC PANELING 066400-3 I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION I PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Insulation under freezers( olyisocyanurate board insulation). .) 2. Perimeter Building or Foundation Insulation (if required) (extruded polystyrene board insulation). 3. Vapor retarders. 4. Sound attenuation insulation (unfaced batt insulation). 5. Thermal Mineral Fiber Insulation(unfaced batt insulation). B. Related Sections include the following: 1 I. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry cells. 2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood framing. 3. Division 07 Section "Polymer-Based Exterior Insulation and Finish System (CIPS)" for insulation specified as part of these systems. 4. Division 07 Section "Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 5. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 6. Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation." 7. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 8. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into Batts(flat-cut lengths)or rolls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) THERMAL INSULATION 072100- 1 1 WINCO FOODS, I.,1.,C 03/13 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. 13. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having ,jurisdiction. identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. I 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM L 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANI)HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. I 13. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. I. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. in other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION t A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: I I. Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. I b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) THERMAL INSULATION 072100-2 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 Id. Pactiv Building Products Division. I2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu, m), unless otherwise indicated. B. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289,Type I, Class 2,with maximum I flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unlaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches(101 mm). II. Manufacturers: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company. Ic. Rmax, Inc. I2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: I 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. I 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning, I B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: II. 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F(2.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). 2. 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 Ideg F(3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). D. Acoustic Batts: ASTM C 665,Type II,Class C, unlaced glass-fiber insulation. 1 1. 3-1/2"thick x 23"wide x lengths required. I2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation Imanufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings. 13. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -3 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.2 PREPARATION111 A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 111 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and I application indicated. 13. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any I time to ice,rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 11, THERMAL INSULATION 072100-4 i I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 IC. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling byapplying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's Iwritten instructions. D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying Iprotection course with joints butted. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION I A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use Imechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to I edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive,mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: I. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If I more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. I 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm)clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of Iinsulation to flanges of metal studs. D. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached. I 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS lA. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. I B. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. I C. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another Iayer of vapor retarder. 1 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, I physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. IENI)OF'SECTION 072100 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) THERMAL INSULATION 072100-5 1 i WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I SECTION 079200-JOINT SEALANTS I PART I -GENERAL I1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. I c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. e. Other joints as required. U2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and control joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. I b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units. c. Other joints as required. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints oints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. I c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry,walls and partitions. e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors,and counters. If. Other joints as required. 4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: Ia. Isolation and control joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs, except for polished concrete,see Specification Section 033300. I b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as required. I IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 1 I FOODS, LLC 03/13 WINCO B. Related Sections include the following: 1 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. 2. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 4. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for sealing tile joints. 5. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings. I 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 111 A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 13. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in I/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 1). SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWR1's Sealant Validation Program. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Compatibi liAyand Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant man-afacturer,-indicating-ihe-following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with_joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. G. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. i-1. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. I WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -2 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project and who has completed similar applications for all products listed with successful results and construction record for the five year minimum. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: Il. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturers/Installers/General Contractor Warranty: Provide a form signed by all parties listed above in which: I. The elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. a. Warranty Period: Five(5)years from date of Substantial Completion. t 2. The Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. a. Warranty Period: Five(5)years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. If notified by the owner of a suspected failure in the elastomeric sealants, the general ' contractor agrees to coordinate with manufacturer and installer for the work required for the warranty period. 4. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: a. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3 L ' WiNCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design b. J specifications. c. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents. d. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS,GENERAL L A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Provide custom matched color of exposed joints to match finish color of adjacent surfaces. If color to be matched abuts two colors and is open for interpretation contact A.O.R. for color to use. C. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,grade,class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be 1. nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E. Suitability for immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class I or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants_is deionized__water, unless otherwise indicated. F. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food,provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -4 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I2.3 EXTERIOR SEALANTS SCHEDULE(ES) I ES-I: Vertical joints of glass, plastic, metal or other non-porous surfaces. Use this product on the interior side of storefront. I . One-part, acetoxy-cure, RTV silicone, Dow Corning Silicone Glazing Sealant or approved equal. IES-2: Vertical joints of masonry,concrete, stone or other porous surfaces. ® Low-modulus, one-part, neutral-cure, 100% Dow Corning contractors concrete sealant or approved equal. ES-3: Horizontal izontal concrete joints. I I 0 One-part, cold-applied silicone, low-modulus Dow Corning 888 silicone joint sealant or approved equal. ES-4: Multi-purpose joint sealant. Ultra-low-modulus, one-part, neutral-cure Dow Corning 790 silicone building sealant or approved equal. II 2.4 INTERIOR SEALANT SCHEDULE(IS) I (NOTE: All cooler and freezer box sealant provided by manufacturer/owner.) (NOTE: Specification Section 033300 for joint filler(sealant)for Architectural Concrete.) I (NOTE: Specification Section 066400 for FRP Sealant) IIS-1: Sealant for interior wet areas. e One-part, aeetoxy-cure Dow Corning 786 silicone mildew resistant sealant or approved Iequal. IS-2: General purpose paintable joints and acoustical sealing of gypsum board walls and ceilings.. 1 ® One-part acrylic latex,"Tremco"Tremflex 834 siliconized acrylic latex sealant or approved equal. I IS-3: Horizontal concrete joints for other than exposed standard or polished gray concrete slabs. (Re: Specification Section 033300, 2.4 Cl for joint sealant for exposed standard or polished gray concrete slabs), I ® One-part, Dow Corning 890-SL self-leveling silicone joint sealant or approved equal. IIS-4: General purpose non-painted joints. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 5 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 ® One-part, acetoxy-cure, RV, Dow Corning general purpose silicone sealant or approved equal. IS-5: Fire rated sealant at corridor walls and Deli hood walls. ® One-component, high-performance elastomeric polyurethane sealant, "Sonolastic" NPI or approved equal. IS-6: Horizontal concrete joints beneath VCT, sheet vinyl or resinous floor finish. self-leveling elastomeric polyurethane, "Sonolastic" SLI or ® One-component, non-priming, self ie a p y approved equal. IS-7: Vertical joints of masonry,concrete,stone or other porous surfaces. O Low-modulus, one-part, neutral-cure, 100% Dow Corning contractors concrete sealant or approved equal. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING I A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene butyl, IDDM, or silicone tubing complying I with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal,to control sealant depth,and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back e oi-nt wliei--such- lbesion would result in sealant failure. Provide-self -- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) II JOINT SEALANTS 079200-6 •I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. t PART 3 - EXECUTION .3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances,and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. ' 13. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of ' joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants,oil,grease, waterproofing, water repellents,water, surface dirt,and frost. ' 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed ' air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. ' b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. ' 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. ' Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. G lass. ' c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 13, Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates,where recommended in writing by joint-sealant ' manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond;do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. ' WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 7 • WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 13. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials,applications,and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist, puncture,or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movementcapability. F. 'Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform brads of f:nration indicated;to eliminate air pockets;and to-en-sure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces, 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION ' A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 I I 1 1 1 I ' WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) JOINT SEALANTS 079200.9 1 1 WINCO FOODS, L,L,C 03/13 1 SECTION 088000- GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1,2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: ' 1. Sneeze guards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass,or both,as ' defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. I 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT'S A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact. loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage ' attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. ' 13. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass litres in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than ' thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: ' a. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior LItes: Not less than 6.0 mm (0.25 inch). C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat.gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) GLAZING 088000- 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 �e (Range): 120 de r F (67 degC: , ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), I l. Temperature Change b ) material surfaces. I 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. I B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that I products furnished comply with requirements. C. Qualification Data: For installers. D. Tinting Film Data: For each type of window film that applies. I 1.6 QUALI'T'Y ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass I installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 13. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass and laminated glass. I C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; clear, of class indicated. a. Available Products: I 1) AFG Industries Inc.; Krystal Klear. 2) Pilkington Building Products North America; Optiwhite. I 3) PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. 13. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; clear, of class, I kind,and condition indicated. I. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered)float glass where indicated. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GLAZING 088000 -2 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 2.2 GLAZING GASKETS ' A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: ' 1. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone,ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. ' 13. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: I. EPDM. 2. Silicone. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. ' C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips,complying with ASTM C 542, black. 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: ' 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as ' demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at ' 3. time of installation. VOC Limit: 250g/L(2.09 lbs/gal) ' B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1 1 Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants GS: a. Products: 1) GE Silicones; SilPrufSCS2000. 2) Pecora Corporation; 864. 3) Pecora Corporation; 890. 4) Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641. ' 5) Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal. 6) Tremco; Spectrem 3. ' WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) GLAZING 088000-3 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 b. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS (nonsag). yl i, e. Class: 100/50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated,O. I) Use 0 Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum ' coated with a high-performance coating and galvanized steel. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating €n contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. ' B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: Type 1,for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated,and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted_in-installation. 13. Cleaners, Primers,and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. I 1. Sealant Primer VOC Limit: a. Non-Porous: 250 g/L(2.09 lbs/gal) C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore,Type A durometer hardness ' required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side ' walking). WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ' GLAZING 088000 -4 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 2.7 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS ' A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units (Window Type "I3"): Class I (clear) annealed or Kind HIS (heat-strengthened)float glass. I. Thickness: 1/4-inch(6.0 mm). B. Uncoated Tempered Float-Glass Units (Doors Nos. 10IA, 101B, 102A and 102B (including sidelites),and Window Type"A"): Class 1 (clear) Kind FT(fully tempered)float glass. ' 1. Thickness: I/4-inch(6.0 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: ' 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. ' 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Mir imam required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GLAZING 088000 -5 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 3.3 GLAZING,GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 13. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, ' minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass mites. G. Provide spacers for glass mites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as fol lows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances , and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to -- --requirements in referdncW_glazing publications. 1. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. , 3,4 TAPE GLAZING ' A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. 13. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ' GLAZING 088000.6 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer, L. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. ' F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass Iites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) ' A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. ' B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) ' A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. ' 13. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. ' WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GLAZING 088000 - 7 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 :3.8 CLEANING AND PRO'T'ECT loN A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction I operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. , C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes,accidents,and vandalism,during construction period. I E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as , recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 ' 1 1 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 GLAZING 088000-8 • I WINCO FOODS; I.,L.0 03/13 I SECTION 092216 -NON-STRUCTURAL METAL. FRAMING I PART I -GENERAL I.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. - Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and ' exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: Studs,Track,etc. 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 111 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS ' A. Framing Members,General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless ' otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use steel studs and runners. I. Steel Studs and Runners: ' a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. fWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 1 1 WINCO FOODS, EEC 03/13 C. Slip-Type ype Head Joints: provideslip Where indicated joints as detailed on drawings for track I Condition to bottom of roof deck, parallel to and connection to bottom of joists and connection to bottom of roof deck or bottom of joist at condition perpendicular to joists.. I D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width if wood blocking is not indicated on drawings. i. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Match stud/track thickness if wood blocking is not indicated on drawings. 111E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, minimum base-metal to match stud/track thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. Detail of bridging as shown on drawings if required,to include depth,clip angle,etc. I F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. I 2. Depth: 7/8 inch or 1-1/2 inches as indicated on Drawings. G. Resilient Furring Channels: I/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: hat shaped. I 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS I A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding , power,and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior CMU/Concrete Walls: Provide the following: I 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel I stud or furring channel size. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 IXAMINATION I A. Examine areas and substrates,with Installer present,and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. I B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I WINCO STORE NC). 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I NON-ST'RUC'i'URAI.,METAL,FRAMING 092216-2 1 3.2 PREPARATIONWINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners I (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide Continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches(610 mm)o.c. B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 -NS`FALLA'i'ION,GENERAL IA. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. I. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. 111 B. Install supplementary framing, and wood blocking as indicated on drawings to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 1 D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. I3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES I A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. Il. Single-Layer Application: Spacing,size and heights as Indicated on drawings. 2. Multilayer Application: Spacing,size and heights as indicated on drawings. 3. Tile Backing Panels: Size and heights as indicated on drawings. I B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. IC. Install studs so flanges within framing system point:in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners)at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural I supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type I-lead Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. IWINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-3 I 1 WINCO FOODS, 1.,LC 03/13 2. Door Openings:��s: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; I >r install runner track section(for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud. c. Extend jamb studs up and attach to underside of overhead structure where indicated on drawings.. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches(1 50 mm)o.c. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing, 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced a minimum of 24 inches(610 mm)o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch(3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 092216 1 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ' NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-4 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I SECTION 092900-GYPSUM BOARD PART I -GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1 L2 - `std MIvLA-RY - -- - --- -- -- A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. IB. Related Sections include the following: I 1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing that supports gypsum board. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board. I3. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 4. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that I incorporate gypsum board. 5. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. I 6. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 7. Division 09 Section "Non Structural Metal Framing" for interior non load bearing steel stud framing. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Fire_ResIstance-Rated Assemblies: I'or fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. I I.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING IA. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1 I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) IGYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD I A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 111 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. 131313 America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PAI3CO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. B. Regular Type: , 1. Thickness: 518-inch(12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 1 C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8-inch (12.7 mm), 5/8-inch (15.9 mm). 1 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1 1. Thickness: 5/8-inch(12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. I 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1 following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. 111 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GYPSUM BOARD 092900-2 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 111 d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f: PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. 1 2. Core: 5/8-inch(15.9 mm), Type X. 13. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI Al 18.9. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following_ a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; UtiI-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 3. Thickness: 1/4-inch on walls as indicated on drawings. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. ' 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped;exposed long flange receives joint compound. • ' d. L-Bead: U-shaped;exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped;exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f Expansion(control)joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. ' 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-I0 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GYPSUM BOARD 092900-3 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 . 1. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type,all-purpose compound. i 3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type,all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting- type, sandable topping compound. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. I 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 111 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from i 0.033 to 0.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size and adhesive recommended by panel manufacturer. I.a. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool,or rock wool. 111 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. L:___ Acoustical_Sealant-As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing,for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 13. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold I damaged. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GYPSUM BOARD 092900-4 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS,GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 13. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting endpoints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate ' supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, 1 etc.),except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. in) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts,pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-(6.4-to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open(unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. I. SIC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 1 A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: 5/8-inch (15.9 mm) as indicated on Drawings. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GYPSUM BOARD 092900-5 i WINCE) FOODS, LLC 03/13 2. Type X: I/2-inch (12.7 mm), 5/8-inch(15.9 mm)as indicated o t Drawings. Yp b 3. Ceiling Type: 5/8-inch(15.9 mm). 4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: 5/8-inch (15.9 mm) in toilets and service departments behind tile or FRP as indicated on drawings. 13. Single-Layer Application: On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally(perpendicular to framing), unless111 otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end jOiltiS. a. Stagger abutting end joints not Less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end ' joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers 111vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 2. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws and adhesive(if required)as listed in the UL Listing. I D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs,joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fasteningadhesivehas set. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at toilets, service departments, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 13. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A 108.1 1,at locations indicated to receive tile. I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GYPSUM BOARD 092900 -6 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions, 13. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 13. Prefill open joints, beveled edges,and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended Ifor tape. U. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated unless a higher level of finish is required due to fire requirements. ' 2. 3. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for FRP and CBU backing. Level 4: All other gypsum board surfaces unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION ' A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1 ENI) OF SECTION 092900 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 7 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 I SECTION 0951 13 - ACOUSTICAL. PANEL CEILINGS I PART 1 -GENERAL 111 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. • I1.2 SUMMARY IA. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS IA. AC: Articulation Class. I13. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. 1 D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. I1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. I1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single I manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. I B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having.jurisdiction. I a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory". 111 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface- burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the �. effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic Zones 0-2." 2. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-1-lung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies-- Seismic Zones 3 &4." 3. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings." 4. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 13, "Earthquake Loads." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination,and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof,wet work in spaces is complete and dry,work above ceilings is complete,and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. I 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) i ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -2 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, ire-suppression system,and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS,GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings,and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches(400 mm)away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM 1)3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; "Cortege"No. 769 2. BPB USA; "Baroque"No. BET-197 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; "Radar"No. 2310 B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: . Type and Form: Type Ill, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. 2. Pattern: CD(perforated, small holes and fissured. C. Color: White WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -3 I r WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 less than 0.80. E. NRC: Not less than 0.50. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. AC: Not less than 170. 1 H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square I. Thickness: 5/8 inch(15 mm) J. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches(610 by 1220 mm). K. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad-spectrum fungicide and bactericide based. 2.3 VINYL, FACED GYPSUM BOARD PANELS FOR FOOD PREPARATION AREA A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: , 1. U.S. Gypsum Ceiling Panels"Sheetrock Brand"No, 3270. 2. Goldbond Ceiling Panels. 3. Armstrong"VL Unperforated". 13. Surface/Pattern: Unperforated, manufacturer's standard smooth pattern,washable,vinyl face. C. Color: White 111 D. Light Reflectance: Not less than .75. E. CAC Range: Not less than 45. F. Type: XX I G. Pattern: G Til. Thickness: 1/2-inch(12.7 mm) square edge. ' I. Size: 24 by 48 inches(50.8 by 101.6 mm) 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS,GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. 1 13. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) t ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -4 1 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design AS'load indicated in � ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces,and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M,Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No.N04400. 4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch-(3.5-mm-) diameter wire. E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 090 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-(8-mm-) diameter bolts. 0. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces. H. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. 1. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in-place. J. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 1 24 inches(610 mm)o.c. on all cross tees. K. Impact Clips: Where indicated,provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING AND VINYL FACED GYPSUM BOARD PANELS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following manufacturers to match Chicago Metallic Corp., Seismic 1200 Intermediate-Duty System: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. BPB USA. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc 5. USG Interiors, Inc WINCO STORE NO. 2.3 (Sushi Kiosk) ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -5 1 1 W 1NCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 Double-Web Steel Suspension C. Wide lace, Capped, System: Main and cross runners roll p formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than 030 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch-(24-mm-)wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat,flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM I A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. I 2. BPB USA 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation 4. Fry Reglet Corporation 5. Gordon, Inc. 6. USG Interiors, Inc. 13. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. I. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. I 2.7 ACOUSTICAL,SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that--fray be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 13. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: I a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. r WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I ACOUSTICAL,PANEL,CEILINGS 095113 -6 • I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 03/13 IPART 3 - EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements • for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ICeilings. I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.2 PREPARATION 1 A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders,and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION IA. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling ISystems Handbook." B. Suspend ceilinghangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1 6 I 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,countersplaying,or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard I suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws,or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,corrosion,or elevated temperatures. 5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, I install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. I 9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 1 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7 I 1 WINCO FOODS, l.,L.,C 03/13 C. Install edge moldings>�s a.nd trim of type ee indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and 111. where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 111 D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent,or kinked members, I E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. I. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. I 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. ENI) OF SECTION 095113 I I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -8 1 WINCO FOODS, L.,L,C 01/14 1 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber base and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast in Place Concrete"and "Architectural Concrete". 2. Division 09 Section "Urethane Resinous Flooring with Broadcast Aggregate". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C)or more than 90 deg F(32 deg C). 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F(35 deg C). WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 I I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/14 C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 111 completed. 1 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that: are packaged with protective I covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) of each type, color, pattern, and size of111 resilient product installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE I A. Rubber Base: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stolen Industries. 1 h. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries,Inc. d. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. e. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite(Canada) Ltd. f: Flexco, Inc. g. iohnsonite. h. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. i. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. _j. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. k. PRF USA, Inc. 111 Roppe Corporation, USA. m. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. B. Rubber Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber,vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group 11 (layered). 3. Style: Cove(base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). I D. Height: 4 inches(102 mm). E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Preformed. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -2 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/14 I - H. Finish: Satin. II. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings. I2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for 111 applications indicated. • B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and IIsubstrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesive VOC Content Limit: Not more than 50 g/1(0,42 Ibs/gal). I 2. Drill type attachments, water-tight sealants at splicers and end caps per manufacturer's recommendations. IPART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum Imoisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 13. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign Ideposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ID. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation for each type of base specified and installed. I3.2 PREPARATION IA. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. IB. Concrete Substrates and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. I 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. IWINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) RI SII..,IENT BASE ANI)ACCESSORIES S 096513 -3 I 1 WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/14 C. Fill cracks, holes, and b depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching 111 p 1 b compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to 1 be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed 1 at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIINT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 13. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 1). Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 1 F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. C. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. I 13. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products, I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 1 I WINCO FOODS, LLC 01/14 B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing both resilient base and sanitary � cove base product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 096513 I I I I I I I I I I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5 I WINCO FOODS INC 03/13 I SECTION 096726 — URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH COLORED QUARTZ BROADCAST AGGRIGATE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCU MINIS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. I 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes resinous flooring systems with urethane body coat and colored quartz broadcast aggregate. 1. Application Method: Troweled or screeded. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at,joints in resinous flooring systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions,and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required. B. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches (150 mm) square,applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project. I C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. D. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring component. IE. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component,signed by manufacturer. F. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who is experienced in applying resinous flooring systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH COLORED QUARTZ BROADCAST AGGREGATE 096726 - 1 I 1 WINCO FOODS INC 03/13 Engage 7e an installer who is certified in writingby resinous flooring manufacturer as b b qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated. 1:3. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats blended colored quartz aggregate, and topcoats, through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE:; AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components. 13. Store materials to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other I detrimental effects. 1.6 PROJ CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application. B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate I permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application. C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH COLORED QUARTZ BROADCAST I AGGREGATE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I 1. BASF 2. Dura-Flex 111 B. Urethane Resinous Flooring basis of design shall be "BASF" Ucrete I-IP/Q on horizontal surfaces and 'WR' on coved base or approved equal. Submit product data for approval. C. System Characteristics: 1. Color: a. BASF: "Gray" b. Dura-Flex: Special#5383C X-223-4-3 WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) 1 URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH COLORED QUARTZ BROADCAST AGGREGATE 096726 -2 I i WINCO FOODS INC 03/13 2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance. 1 3. Integral Cove Base: See drawings for height. 1 4. Overall System Thickness: 3/8 inch(9mm) D. System Components: Manufacturer's standard components that are compatible with each other and as follows: 1. Body Coat: a. Resin: Urethane. b. Application Method: Troweled or screeded. c. Floor Coat: 1) Thickness of Coat: 5/16-inch (6.4 mm) for floor. 2) Number of Coats: One. d. Coved Base Coats. 1) Thickness of Coats: 1/8- inch(3.22mm). 1 2) Number of Coats: 2 to form final thickness of 1/4 inch(6.4mm) e. Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard blended colored quartz aggregate. 2. Clear Urethane Lock Coat: a. "SEI..BY" 600 Lockcoat comprised of 2 parts of A665 resin and I part 13630 curing agent. b. Application Method: Squeegee and backroll. c. Number of Coats: (1) 1/16"thickness. Place top coat at 80 sf/gal. d. Thickness: 1/16" total single clear coat thickness to yield an overall system thickness of 3/8". 1 3. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coat(s) indicated. E. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated: 1. Compressive Strength: 8128 PSI per ASTM C 579. 2. Tensile Strength: 880 PSI per ASTM C 307. 3. Flexural Strength: 2325 PSI per ASTM C 580. 4, Water Absorption: <0.1% per ASTM C 413. 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 2.7 x I 0 5 in/in/° per ASTM C 531. 6. Impact Resistance: No visible damage or deterioration at min. 160 in-lbs. per ASTM D2794. 7. Resistance to Elevated Temperature: No flow or softening per MIL-D-3134. 8. Abrasion Resistance: 0.07 g loss; maximum weight loss per ASTM D 4060, F. System Chemical Resistance: Test specimens of cured resinous flooring system are unaffected when tested according to ASTM D 1308 for up to 7 days at 72°F for the following chemicals. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH COLORED QUARTZ BROADCAST AGGREGATE 096726-3 1 I I. b WINCC) FOODS INC.03/13 Dilute mineral acids including hydrochloric (< 35%), phosphoric (< 50%), and sulfuric I (<30%). 2. Alkalis, including potassium hydroxide to a 50%concentration. 3. Some diluted organic acids such as acetic(30%),formic,citric and uric. 4. Fats,oils and sugars. 5. Mineral oils,diesel fuel, kerosene and gasoline. 11 6. Most organic solvents, including aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and alcohol. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. I B. Joint Sealant: Type recommended or produced by resinous flooring manufacturer for type of service and joint condition indicated. 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content. of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written I instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral Ph substrate for resinous flooring application. 13. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring. 1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows: a. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent. 2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Verify that concrete substrates are thy. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application I only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m)of slab in 24 hours. h. Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH COLORED QUARTZ BROADCAST AGGREGATE 096726-4 I I WINCC) FOODS INC 03/13 4. Verify that concrete substrates have neutral Ph and that resinous flooring will adhere to them. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. I . Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks torevent cracks from reflecting p through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.2 APPLICATION A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. 1 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate,and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. 3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. a. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. 13. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply waterproofing membrane,where indicated, in manufacturer's recommended thickness. 1. Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates. D. Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks. E. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding,and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners. 111 F. Apply troweled or screeded body coat in thickness indicated for flooring system. Backroll with a loop and spike roller to level the body coat to the specified thickness, allowing the applied material to settle. Immediately broadcast the specified aggregate into the wet mix. Apply the aggregate beyond the point of rejection or 1.5 lbs/ft2(7.3kg/m2). G. Allow 12 hours for the Ucrete to cure, then sweep stone and vacuum excess aggregate. H. Apply clear Selby urethane lock coat by squeegee and backroll to the desired uniform finish. Allow for a 12-hour cure at 70°-72°F. 111 WiNCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH COLORED QUARTZ BROADCAST AGGREGATE 096726-5 I WINCO FOODS INC 03/13 3.3 FIELD QUALITY Y C.UN I ItOI., A. Material Sampling: Owner may at any time and any number of times during resinous flooring application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements. 1. Owner may engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used. Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in 111' manufacturer's product data. 3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, Contractor shall pay for testing, removal of noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and apply flooring materials to comply with specified requirements. I 3.4 PROTECTING A. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing I by resinous flooring manufacturer to protect the system from water, airborne particles or other surface contaminates until cured and tack free, approximately (12) twelve hours at 70° after application. Protect the resinous flooring system from damage and wear during the remainder of the construction period and until all other trades are completed with their work. 1111 B. Protect completed system from immersion and chemical exposure until thoroughly cured, approximately 7 days. C. Protect from migrating plasticizers from tires that may discolor the floor. Rubber mats made specifically for this purpose shall be utilized as protection under tires. . I 3.5 CLEAN UP I A. Remove wasted materials, rubbish and debris and dispose of them in accordance with local regulations. Leave work area in a clean and undisturbed condition. END OF SECTION 096726 I I I WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) I URETHANE RESINOUS FLOORING WITH COLORED QUARTZ BROADCAST AGGREGATE 096726-6 I I WINCO FOOD, LLC 10/13 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING(CALIFORNIA) I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete masonry units(CMU). 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board. 13. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting (California)" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 2. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. II. Submit Samples on rigid backing,8 inches(200 mm)square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: II. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 I I W1NCO FOOD, 1.1,C 10/13 1.5 DELIVERY,ERY STORAGE,AND HANDLING I V . A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F(7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. I 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F(10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point;or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as I materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1 I. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than I gal. (3.8 I.,)of each material and color applied. PARI'2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Benjamin Moore&Co. 111 2. ----BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing. 3. California Paints. 4. Columbia Paint&Coatings. 5. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 6. Glidden Co. (The) 7, ICI Paints. 8. Kwal-Howells Paint. 9. Martin Semour Co. 10. Miller Paint. 1 I. O'Brien Paint Co. 12. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 13. Pratt and Lambert Co. 14. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). I Kiosk) I WINC.C) STORE NO. 23 (Sushi INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -2 II I WINCO FOOD, LLC 10/13 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL IA. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another I and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2, For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. IB. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoatp aints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following I chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: I I. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than I.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: I a. Acrolein. b, Acrylonitrile. Ic, Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl)phthalate, h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. I,2 dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. I. Dimethyl phthalate. I m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. I-lexavalent chromium. I p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene(methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. C. Colors: As indicated in color schedule on drawings. 1 2.3 BLOCK FILLERS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -3 I I WINCO FOOD, I...LC 10/13 I. VOC Content: F Range of E2, not more than 100 g/L.. I 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS I A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI ##50. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2-E3, not more than 100 g/L. 13. Interior Wood Latex Primer: MPI #39. 1 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2, not more than 100 gIL. 1 2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Rust Inhibitive Water Based Metal Primer: MPI #107. 1 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3, not more than 100 g/L.. B. Water Based Galvanized Primer: MPI #I34. I 1. VOC Content: F Range of E2, not more than 1 00 g/L. 2.6 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Wood Latex Primer: MN#39. I 1. VOC Content: F Range of E2, not more than 100 g/L. 2.7 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex(Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2, not more than 100 g/L. I B. -Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54(Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2-E3, not more than 100 g/L. I C. Interior Water Based Light Industrial Coating(Semigloss): MPI #153 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2-E3, not more than 100 g/L. D. Interior Water Based Light Industrial Coating(Gloss): MPT#154(Gloss Level 6). 1 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3,-not more than 150 g/L. I WINCO STORE NC). 23 (Sushi Kiosk) i INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -4 I I WINCO FOOD, LLC 10/13 I2.8 EPDXY PAINT IA. Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex(Gloss): MPI#1 15 (Gloss Level 6). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2-E3,not more than 150 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINA'T'ION I A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. I B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. III 2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. I5, Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 11 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. I 3.2 PREPARATION 1 ION 1 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that:are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating,or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and Iincompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required I to produce paint systems indicated. WINCO STORE NO.23 (Sushi Kiosk) INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -5 I 1 WINCO FOOD, I.,I.,C 10/13 D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do b not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. I E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. P. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I-i. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots,and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces,undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. I. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. J. Steel Joists: The final finish for Steel Joists is the manufacturers shop primed finish. Use the primer provided by the Joist Manufacturer for touch-up paint. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with primecoatonly. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish,color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color I' breaks. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -6 I I W INCO FOOD, LLC 10/13 IE. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including,but not limited to,the following: I1, Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. thatII donot factory-applied final finishes. C[. Tanks o have e a c e, Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering I or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. I2. Electrical Work: Switchgear. Ia. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. F. 'Pouch-Up Paint on Steel Joists: Inspect all steel joists' installation and clean, prep and touch-up primer paint as required to yield consistent primed surfaces. Note: Steel Joists Primer will be Il furnished by Joist. Manufacturer. RE: 052100. 3.4 FIILD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: I1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. I 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying- paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are Iincompatible. I3.5 CLIANING AND PROTECTION workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from A. At end of each Y� p Y €� I Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping,or other methods. DC)not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 I I WINCO FOOD, LLC 10/13 C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of I other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. I 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. CMU Substrates: I I. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex,Gloss Level 4(satin). B. Steel Substrates: I. Water Based Light Industrial Coating System: MPI INT 5.113. I a. Prime Coat: Rust Inhibitive Water Based metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior water based light industrial coating matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior water based light industrial coating,Gloss Level 6(gloss). C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: I 1. Water Based Light Industrial Coating System: MPI INT 5.3K. a. Prime Coat: Water based galvanized primer. I b. Intermediate Coat: Interior water based light industrial coating matching topcoat. c. 'Topcoat: Interior water based light industrial coating,Gloss Level 5 (semigloss). II 1). Dressed Lumber Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T. I a. Prime Coat: Interior wood latex primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex, Gloss Level 5 (semigloss). I. E. Wood Panel Substrates: (Including painted plywood and MDF.) III 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R. a. Prime Coat: Interior wood latex primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex,Gloss I..,evel 5 (semigloss). F. Gypsum Board Substrates: j 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. WINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 . I I WINCO FOOD, 1.1.,C 10/13 Ia. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Ic. Topcoat: Interior latex,Gloss Level 4(satin). 2. Epoxy Modified Latex System: MN INT 9.2F. Ia. Prime Coat: Interior Latex Primer/Scaler b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex Gloss Level 6 (gloss). END OF SECTION 099123 I I I I I I I I. I I I it IWINCO STORE NO. 23 (Sushi Kiosk) . INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -9 I